manualshive.com logo in svg

Ricoh B079, Service Manual

Share
Download
Ricoh B079 Service Manual Download Page 352

IMAGE PROCESSING 

 

B079/B082 6-20 

SM 

6.5.5  IMAGE PROCESSING MODES 

The user can select one of the following modes with the User Tools screen: Text, 
Text/Photo, Photo, Pale, Generation. Each of these modes has a range of different 
settings (e.g. Soft, Normal, Sharp, etc). For each mode, a Custom Setting options 
is also available. This Custom Setting holds the values selected with the SP 
modes, which can be adjusted to meet special requirements that cannot be 
covered by the standard settings. 
To display this screen, press User Tools/Counter> Copier/Document Server 
Settings> General Features> Copy Quality. 
 

 

Mode Function 

Text 

Best reproduction of text and sharp lines. Ignores background 
texture. (

!

 pg. 6-23) 

Text/Photo 

Good reproduction of mixed text and photographs with accurate 
grayscaling, better than that achieved in the Text mode. (

!

 pg. 6-

24) 

Photo 

Best possible reproduction of photographs. (

!

 pg.6-25)  

Pale 

Reproduction similar to Text mode, but of lower contrast. Ideal for 
copying thin originals. (

!

 pg.6-26) 

Generation Copy 

Attempts to achieve the best reproduction of copied originals, which 
have faded due to making copies of copies. (

!

 pg.6-27) 

 

 

B079D906.WMF 

Summary of Contents for B079

Page 1: ...B079 B082 SERVICE MANUAL 001634MIU RICOH GROUP COMPANIES ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...B079 B082 SERVICE MANUAL RICOH GROUP COMPANIES ...

Page 4: ......

Page 5: ...B079 B082 SERVICE MANUAL 001634MIU ...

Page 6: ......

Page 7: ...ERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION All product names domain names or product illustrations including desktop images used in this document are trademarks registered trademarks or the property of their respective companies They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and for the benefit of such companies No such use or the use of any trade name or web site is intended...

Page 8: ......

Page 9: ...ation Users of this manual should be either service trained or certified by successfully completing a Ricoh Technical Training Program Untrained and uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury damage to property or loss of warranty protection Ricoh Corporation WARNING ...

Page 10: ......

Page 11: ...LEGEND PRODUCT CODE COMPANY GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN B079 3532 LD035 Aficio 2035 4035 B082 4532 LD045 Aficio 2045 4045 DOCUMENTATION HISTORY REV NO DATE COMMENTS 05 2003 Original Printing ...

Page 12: ......

Page 13: ...T INSTALLATION B542 1 18 1 4 1 ACCESSORY CHECK 1 18 1 4 2 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 19 1 5 CABINET INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 23 1 6 1 BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION B544 1 26 1 6 1 ACCESSORY CHECK 1 26 1 6 2 1 BIN TRAY INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 27 1 7 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION B538 1 33 1 7 1 ACCESSORY CHECK 1 33 1 7 2 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 34 1 8 TWO TRAY FINISHER INSTALLAT...

Page 14: ...VENTIVE MAINTENANCE 2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 2 1 2 1 PM TABLE 2 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3 1 3 1 GENERAL CAUTIONS 3 1 3 1 1 LASER UNIT 3 1 3 1 2 USED TONER 3 1 3 2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS 3 2 3 2 1 SPECIAL TOOLS 3 2 3 2 2 LUBRICANTS 3 2 3 2 3 SYMBOLS USED IN TEXT 3 2 3 3 FRONT DOOR 3 3 3 4 DUPLEX UNIT 3 3 3 5 UPPER RIGHT COVER 3 4 3 6 BY PASS TRAY 3 5...

Page 15: ... 35 3 12 4 DEVELOPER 3 36 3 12 5 TD SENSOR 3 38 3 13 TRANSFER UNIT 3 39 3 13 1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT 3 39 3 13 2 TRANSFER BELT 3 40 3 13 3 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING BLADE AND TONER OVERFLOW SENSOR 3 41 3 14 PAPER FEED 3 42 3 14 1 PICK UP SEPARATION AND FEED ROLLERS 3 42 3 14 2 LOWER RIGHT COVER 3 43 3 14 3 RELAY UPPER PAPER FEED AND LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCHES 3 44 3 14 4 UPPER PAPER FEED UNIT FOR TRAY 1 ...

Page 16: ...REGISTRATION CLUTCH AND TRANSFER BELT CONTACT CLUTCH 3 74 3 18 2 MAIN MOTOR 3 75 3 18 3 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR 3 76 3 19 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS 3 77 3 19 1 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY 3 77 3 19 2 IOB 3 78 IOB DIP Switch Settings SW101 3 79 3 19 3 BICU BOARD 3 80 3 19 4 PSU 3 80 3 20 HARD DISK CONTROLLER BOARD 3 81 3 21 COPY ADJUSTMENTS PRINTING SCANNING 3 82 3 21 1 PRINTING 3 82 Registration Leading Edg...

Page 17: ... Table SP2 902 2 IPU Test Print 5 70 Test Pattern Table SP2 902 3 Printing Test Patterns 5 71 5 1 5 INPUT CHECK 5 72 Main Machine Input Check SP5 803 5 72 ARDF Input Check SP6 007 5 76 5 1 6 OUTPUT CHECK 5 77 Main Machine Output Check SP5 804 5 77 ARDF Output Check SP6 008 5 79 5 1 7 SMC PRINT OUT LISTS SP5 990 5 79 5 1 8 NIP BAND WIDTH ADJUSTMENT SP1 109 5 83 5 1 9 MEMORY CLEAR SP5 801 5 84 5 1 1...

Page 18: ...e Debug Log to the IC Card 5 102 Converting the Debug Log to Binary Data 5 102 Analyzing the Debug Log Binary Data 5 103 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 6 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 6 1 6 1 OVERVIEW 6 1 6 1 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 6 1 6 1 2 PAPER PATH 6 3 6 1 3 DRIVE LAYOUT 6 4 6 2 BOARD STRUCTURE 6 5 6 2 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM 6 5 6 2 2 CONTROLLER 6 7 6 3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW 6 10 Exposure 6 10 Drum charge...

Page 19: ...to Mode Grayscale 6 39 Photo Mode Image Quality 6 40 6 5 13 OTHERS 6 41 Vertical Black Line Correction 6 41 Density Settings 6 42 ADS Level 6 43 6 5 14 PRACTICAL APPLICATION OF SP MODES 6 44 Solving Problems 6 44 Recommended Settings for MTF Filters 6 45 6 6 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT PCU 6 47 6 6 1 OVERVIEW 6 47 6 6 2 DRIVE MECHANISM 6 48 6 6 3 DRUM PAWLS 6 48 6 6 4 DRUM TONER SEALS 6 48 6 6 5 DRUM CLEA...

Page 20: ... 6 10 6 PAPER REGISTRATION 6 68 6 10 7 PAPER SIZE DETECTION 6 69 6 11 BY PASS TRAY 6 70 6 11 1 OVERVIEW 6 70 6 11 2 BY PASS TRAY OPERATION 6 71 6 11 3 BY PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION 6 72 6 12 DUPLEX UNIT 6 73 6 12 1 OVERVIEW 6 73 6 12 2 DUPLEX DRIVE LAYOUT 6 74 6 12 3 DUPLEX BASIC OPERATION 6 75 Larger than A4 lengthwise LT lengthwise 6 75 Up to A4 lengthwise LT lengthwise 6 75 6 12 4 DUPLEX UNIT FE...

Page 21: ...N 6 96 6 15 ENERGY SAVER MODES 6 97 6 15 1 OVERVIEW 6 97 6 15 2 ENERGY SAVER MODE 6 98 Entering the energy saver mode 6 98 What happens in energy saver mode 6 98 Return to stand by mode 6 98 6 15 3 AUTO OFF MODE 6 99 Entering off stand by and off modes 6 99 Off Stand by mode 6 99 Off Mode 6 99 Returning to stand by mode 6 99 SPECIFICATIONS 7 SPECIFICATIONS 7 1 7 1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 7 1 7 2 MA...

Page 22: ...SECTION B408 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 TRAY FINISHER B545 SEE SECTION B545 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS BRIDGE UNIT B538 SEE SECTION B538 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS PRINTER OPTION B548 SEE SECTION B548 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS FAX OPTION B547 SEE SECTION B547 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS ...

Page 23: ...nside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the copier is operating Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS 1 Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed 2 Always replace the ozone filters with the specified ones at the specified intervals 3 Toner and developer are non toxic but if you get either of th...

Page 24: ...iological Health CDRH prohibits the repair of laser based optical units in the field The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer The laser chassis is not repairable in the field Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsys...

Page 25: ...entions in this Manual This manual uses several symbols Symbol What it means Refer to section number See Core Tech Manual for details Screw Connector E ring Clip ring Long Edge Feed LEF Short Edge Feed SEF ...

Page 26: ......

Page 27: ...EMENT AND ADJUSTMENT LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B543 TROUBLESHOOTING BOOKLET FINISHER B546 1000 SHEET FINISHER B408 2 TRAY FINISHER B545 SERVICE TABLES DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS SPECIFICATIONS 1 BIN TRAY B544 BRIDGE UNIT B538 TAB POSITION 2 TAB POSITION 1 TAB POSITION 3 TAB POSITION 4 TAB POSITION 6 TAB POSITION 5 TAB POSITION 8 TAB POSITION 7 ...

Page 28: ......

Page 29: ...INSTALLATION ...

Page 30: ......

Page 31: ...er switch off NOTE The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or writing data 1 1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS CAUTION B079I016 WMF Rating Voltage of Output Connector Max DC24 V LCT Rating Voltage of Output Connector Max ...

Page 32: ... temperature changes 1 Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner 2 Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater 7 Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gases 8 Do not install the machine at any location over 2 000 m 6 500 ft above sea level 9 Place the main machine on a strong and level base Inclination on any side should be no more than 5 mm 0 2 10 Do not...

Page 33: ...near the power source providing clearance as shown NOTE The 75 cm 29 5 recommended for the space at the front is for pulling out the paper tray only If the operator stands at the front of the main machine more space is required B079I010 WMF A Front 75 cm 29 6 B Left 10 cm 4 C Rear 10 cm 4 D Right 10 cm 4 B C D A ...

Page 34: ...INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS B079 B082 1 4 SM B079I012 WMF B079I014 WMF 670 mm 26 4 180 mm 7 1 726 mm 28 6 670 mm 23 4 620 mm 24 4 ...

Page 35: ...e main machine and easily accessible Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet 2 Avoid multi wiring 3 Be sure to ground the machine 1 Input voltage level North America 120 V 60 Hz More than 12 5 A Europe Asia 220 V 240V 50 Hz 60 Hz more than 6 8 A 2 Permissible voltage fluctuation 10 3 Never set anything on the power cord ...

Page 36: ...rs Other requirements See Overall Machine Information Installation Option Table Unpack Copier Install the copier Install the bridge unit if required Install the remaining options in any order Place Copier on the paper tray unit or cabinet Install the paper tray unit Does the user require the Paper Tray Unit or Cabinet LCT or Finisher Yes No If the customer requires the 1 bin tray Remove the scanne...

Page 37: ...ddle Front Cover 1 7 NECR English 17 57 Machines 1 8 NECR Multi Language 19 21 27 28 29 67 Machines 1 9 HDD Caution Decals 17 19 21 28 29 57 Machines 1 10 Model Name Decal 17 29 57 Machines 1 11 Model Name Decals NRG 22 62 Machines 1 12 Stamp 17 Machine 1 13 EU Safety Information 22 24 26 27 62 66 67 Machines 1 14 Blank Decals NRG 22 62 Machines 1 15 Operation Panel Indicator Decals 22 24 26 27 62...

Page 38: ...nner cushion A and install the end fence B 3 Pull out the paper trays and remove all tape and bottom plate stoppers C 4 On the right side of the machine open the by pass tray duplex unit and transfer right cover and then remove all the shipping retainers D NOTE If the paper tray unit is to be installed do this now 1 4 5 If the paper tray unit is not to be installed install the middle front cover E...

Page 39: ... front cover and remove the tape and retainers A 2 Loosen B x 1 and rotate the bracket C 3 Open the right cover D 4 Raise the lever E 5 Holding the PCU F as shown slide it out and place it on a clean flat surface 6 Remove clamps and wire G B079I104 WMF B079I511 WMF B079I900 WMF A B C D E F G ...

Page 40: ...Make sure the area is free of pins paper clips staples etc to avoid attraction to the magnetic development roller 8 Slide the development unit A out and place it on the paper 9 Remove the tape and tag B from the development unit 10 Remove the entrance seal plate C x 2 B079I512 WMF B079I105 WMF A B C ...

Page 41: ...e lot number 1 15 1 Pour approximately 1 3 of the developer evenly along the length of the development unit 2 Rotate the drive gear C to work the developer into the unit 3 Repeat until all the developer is in the development unit 4 Continue to turn the drive gear until the developer is even with the top of the unit 13 Reassemble the development unit NOTE Make sure that the earth plate D is positio...

Page 42: ...well NOTE Do not remove the toner bottle cap D until after shaking 3 Unscrew the bottle cap and set the bottle in the holder NOTE Do not touch the inner bottle cap E 4 Push the toner bottle holder into the main machine until it locks in place and then lower the holder lever to secure the toner bottle NOTE The holder lever cannot be lowered unless the toner bottle is installed B079I514 WMF B D A C ...

Page 43: ...or the paper size 3 Turn the dial D to the correct setting for the paper size 4 Pinch the sides of the bottom fence E and move it to the appropriate mark for the paper size then load the paper 5 Check the position of the stack Confirm that there is no gap between the stack and the side fences If you see a gap adjust the position of the side fences After loading the stack confirm that the right sid...

Page 44: ... fences 7 Attach the appropriate paper size decal B to the paper tray 8 Paper size decals are also used for the optional paper tray unit Keep any remaining decals for use with the paper tray unit 9 Repeat this procedure to load paper in the 2nd paper tray B079I108 WMF B079I110 WMF A B ...

Page 45: ...number of the developer enter the 7 digit lot number press Yes and then press Execute on the touch panel This initializes the TD sensor NOTE The lot number is printed on the end of the developer package Recording the lot number could help troubleshoot problems later If the lot number is unavailable enter any seven digit number 8 Press SP Direct to highlight SP Direct and enter 2805 press and then ...

Page 46: ...display The 1st 2nd 3rd and 4th paper trays are provided with paper size dial selectors The dial settings on the paper trays have priority over the UP settings However if you select the asterisk position on the paper size dial you can select the paper size with the UP setting 8 Check the copy quality and machine operation NOTE The test pattern print procedure is slightly different for this machine...

Page 47: ...am Mode but executing this SP has no effect HDD Caution Decal 1 Attach the HDD Caution decal A to the front cover Exposure Glass Cleaner 1 Attach the exposure glass cleaner holder B to the left side of the machine 2 Place the exposure glass cleaner C inside the holder NOTE The exposure glass cleaner is used to clean the ARDF exposure glass the glass strip to the left of the large exposure glass 10...

Page 48: ...ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list Description Q ty 1 Knob Screw M3 1 2 Knob Screw M4 1 3 Joint Bracket 1 4 Front Stand 1 5 Rear Stand 1 6 Stand Bracket 1 7 NECR 1 8 Installation Procedure 1 NECR New Equipment Condition Report ...

Page 49: ...9 B082 1 4 2 PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Unpack the paper tray unit 2 Remove all tape and shipping materials 3 Remove the paper trays A B542I557 WMF B542I112 WMF A ...

Page 50: ...th the peg holes on the bottom of the machine NOTE Do not hold the scanner unit 7 Re install the middle front cover A 8 Attach the spring washer E to the short knob screw F Then secure the paper tray unit 9 Open the right cover of the paper tray unit G 10 Secure the joint bracket H 1 long knob screw 11 Remove the connector cover I of the main machine x 1 12 Connect the paper tray unit harness J to...

Page 51: ...Installation PAPER TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION B542 SM 1 21 B079 B082 13 Install the front and rear stands A as shown above 14 Install the stand bracket B B542I118 WMF B542I119 WMF B A A ...

Page 52: ...nd install the paper trays 16 Attach the appropriate tray decals A which are included in the accessory box for the main machine 17 Turn on the ac switch 18 Turn the paper size dial to the correct setting for the paper size 19 Check the machine s operation and copy quality B542I500 WMF A A ...

Page 53: ...ug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Unpack the cabinet 2 Remove all tape and shipping materials 3 Install the 2 longer A locating pins and the shorter B locating pin 4 Install the LCT mounting screws C 2 types x2 5 Remove the paper trays D B542I557 WMF B542I112 WMF D B A C ...

Page 54: ...handles and rear handles lift the machine and hold it over the cabinet C 8 Slowly lower the machine onto the cabinet with the pegs D aligned with the peg holes on the bottom of the machine NOTE Do not hold the scanner unit 9 Re install the middle front cover A 10 Attach the step screw E Then secure the cabinet B542I113 WMF B C D E F A ...

Page 55: ...Installation CABINET INSTALLATION PROCEDURE SM 1 25 B079 B082 11 Install the front and rear stands A as shown above 12 Install the stand bracket B B542I118 WMF B542I119 WMF B A A ...

Page 56: ...tion of the accessories in the box against the following list Description Q ty 1 Ground Bracket 1 2 Connector Cover 1 3 Base Cover 1 4 Arm Cover 1 5 Copy Tray 1 6 Mylar Strip 2 7 Stepped Screw M3 x 8 5 8 Screw M3 x 8 2 9 Screw M4 x 7 1 10 Tapping Screw M3 x 6 2 11 Tapping Screw M3 x 14 1 12 Tapping Screw M3 x 8 1 13 Installation Procedure 1 ...

Page 57: ...TION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Remove Scanner Unit NOTE If the ARDF is installed remove the ARDF before removing the scanner unit 1 Remove the connector cover A 2 Disconnect the scanner cable B 3 Remove the scanner unit C x 3 B544I114 WMFF B544I113 WMF C A B ...

Page 58: ...bracket B x 1 from the top of the paper exit cover C 4 Remove the paper exit cover C x 4 5 Cut away two covers D from the base cover E 6 Trim the edges so they are smooth 7 Install the base cover E x 3 stepped screw 8 Set the 1 bin tray unit F on the base cover and slide onto the heads of the stepped screws B544I201 WMF B544I102 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 59: ...ray unit A x 1 M3 x14 10 Remove the cover B 11 Install the grounding bracket C x 2 M3 x 6 12 Connect the harness D 13 Install the connector cover E x 1 M3 x 8 14 Re install the front bracket F x 2 M4 x 7 M4 x 10 and the rear bracket G x 1 M4 x 10 B544I492 WMF B544I103 WMF A B C D E F G ...

Page 60: ...pped x 2 into the side of the 1 bin tray housing 2 Attach the copy tray B to the stepped screws Bridge Unit B538 has been installed 1 Open the cover of the bridge unit C 2 First remove the copy tray bracket D x 1 3 Install the copy tray bracket x 1 tapping screw 4 Re install the copy tray E x 1 B544I493 WMF B544I501 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 61: ...djust the height of the scanner stand first remove B x 2 to release the scanner stand C 18 Raise the scanner stand until the next set of screw holes in the main frame can be seen through the screw holes in the scanner stand 19 Secure the stand x 2 and install the arm cover D x 1 B544I104 WMF B544I500 WMF A B C D ...

Page 62: ...ON B544 B079 B082 1 32 SM 20 Attach two mylar strips A to the scanner stand B 21 Reinstall the scanner stand cover 22 Reinstall the scanner unit 23 Turn on the main switch and check the 1 bin tray unit operation B544I106 WMF A B ...

Page 63: ...B079 B082 1 7 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION B538 1 7 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list Description Q ty 1 Stepped Screw 2 2 Connector Cover 1 3 Exit Mylar 2 4 Installation Procedure 1 ...

Page 64: ...re 1 Unpack the bridge unit and remove all tapes shipping retainers 2 Remove the inner tray A 3 On the side of the machine remove the three small covers B If the optional external output tray A825 will be installed instead of a finisher do Step 4 4 Remove the two small covers C 5 Remove the cover D x 1 6 Remove the cap E B538I407 WMF B538I401 WMF B538I500 WMF D B E A C ...

Page 65: ...ttach two mylars A to the bridge unit 8 Remove the cover B 9 Install the bridge unit C x 2 10 Connect the bridge unit I F harnesses D x 2 11 Install the connector cover E 12 Turn on the main switch and check the bridge unit operation make sure that there are no paper jams B538I402 WMF B538I404 WMF A B D C E ...

Page 66: ...LLATION B545 1 8 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list Description Q ty 1 Front Joint Bracket 1 2 Rear Joint Bracket 1 3 Shift Tray 2 4 Screw M4 x 8 2 5 Screw M4 x 12 5 6 Ground Plate 1 7 Installation Procedure 1 ...

Page 67: ...t B542 must be installed before installing this finisher 1 Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and shipping retainers from outside the unit A 2 Open the front door B and remove all tapes and shipping materials from inside the finisher unit 3 Save the retainer C and other shipping material NOTE The retainer C must be re installed in the finisher before moving or shipping the finisher to anothe...

Page 68: ...o the center of the paper tray unit as shown 6 Open the front door of the finisher and pull out the locking lever D x 1 7 Push the finisher to the side of the machine with the holes in the finisher aligned with the joint brackets and then dock the finisher against the machine 8 Push in the locking lever and secure it x 1 then close the front door B545I104 WMF B545I105 WMF A B C D ...

Page 69: ...STALLATION B545 SM 1 39 B079 B082 9 Install two trays A x 1 each 10 Connect the finisher cable B to the main machine below the right rear handle 11 Turn on the main switch and check the finisher operation B545I103 WMFF B545I106 WMF A B ...

Page 70: ...ION B377 1 9 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list Description Q ty 1 Punch unit 1 2 Sensor arm 1 3 Hopper 1 4 Step screw 1 5 Spring 1 6 Spacer 2 mm 1 7 Spacer 1 mm 1 8 Tapping screw 1 9 Tapping screw 2 ...

Page 71: ...in machine and unplug its power cord If the Two Tray Finisher is installed disconnect it and pull it away from the machine 1 7 1 Unpack the punch unit and remove all tapes and shipping retainers 2 Open the front door and remove the rear cover A x4 3 Remove the bracket B x2 and paper guide C x 1 B377I102 WMF B377I103 WMF A B C ...

Page 72: ...377 B079 B082 1 42 SM 4 Remove the hopper cover A x 2 5 Install the sensor bracket B stepped x 1 6 Install the spring C 7 Install the 2 mm spacer D 8 Install the punch unit E x 2 stepped x 1 B377I101 WMF B377I104 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 73: ... unit sends an identification signal to the machine board so it knows what type of punch unit has been installed 10 Slide the hopper B into the machine 11 Fasten the two 1 mm spacers C to the rear frame for future adjustment NOTE The spacers are used to adjust the horizontal positioning of the holes 12 Reassemble the finisher and check the punch operation B377I105 WMF B377I106 WMF A B C ...

Page 74: ...TION B541 1 10 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list Description Q ty 1 Stepped Screw 2 2 Screw M4 x 10 2 3 Attention Decal Scanner 1 4 Attention Decal Top Cover 1 5 Installation Procedure 1 ...

Page 75: ...ALLATION B541 SM 1 45 B079 B082 1 10 2 ARDF INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Unpack the ARDF and remove all tapes and shipping retainers B541I904 WMF ...

Page 76: ...ing the screw keyholes B of the ARDF support plate over the stud screws and slide the ARDF toward the front of the machine NOTE To avoid damaging the ARDF hold it as shown in the illustration 4 Secure the ARDF C x 2 5 Connect the I F cable D x 1 to the main machine B541I905 WMF B541I124 WMF A B C D ...

Page 77: ... shown choosing the language most suitable for the machine installed 10 Attach the decal D to the cover so that the arrow on the decal lines up with the groove E of the left scale as shown As with step 9 choose the language most suitable for the machine installed 11 Turn on the main switch 12 Check the ARDF operation and copy quality Be sure to check and adjust the registration for the ARDF with t...

Page 78: ...ARDF SKEW ADJUSTMENT 1 Remove the tape A covering the elliptical hole 2 Remove right screw B and install it into the elliptical hole C 3 Move the right side of the ARDF forward or back to adjust the position then tighten the screw B079R724 WMFF A B C ...

Page 79: ...543 1 11 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list Description Q ty 1 Joint Pin 2 2 Stepped Screw M3 x 18 4 3 Magnet Cover 1 4 NECR 17 27 machines 1 5 Installation Procedure 1 NECR New Equipment Condition Report ...

Page 80: ...er Tray Unit B542 must be installed before installing the LCT 1 Unpack the LCT and remove the tapes 2 Open the right cover of the paper tray unit A 3 Open the lower right cover B and cut the holding band C NOTE When cutting the holding band the upper part of the band should be cut as shown Otherwise paper jams may occur 4 Remove the lower right cover B543I504 WMF C B A ...

Page 81: ...ever B and slide the LCT to the right front view 8 Hang the LCT C on the joint pins then secure the brackets D x 4 9 Return the LCT to the previous position and connect the LCT cable E 10 Open the LCT cover and load the paper 11 Turn on the ac switch and check the LCT operation B543I503 WMF E D C B A ...

Page 82: ...29 B079 B082 1 52 SM 1 12 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION G329 1 Install A x 2 on the top cover as shown 2 Position the platen cover bracket B on the heads of the stud screws and slide the platen cover C to the left B079I904 WMF B C A A ...

Page 83: ...heck the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list Description Q ty 1 Upper Tray 1 2 Shift Tray 1 3 Tapping Screw M4 x 6 2 4 Rail Ass y 1 5 Joint Bracket 1 6 Tapping Screw M4 x 16 8 7 Rail Bracket 1 8 Tapping Screw M4 x 6 1 9 Harness Cover 1 10 Sensor Feeler 1 B546I101 WMF 1 2 10 4 5 3 7 8 9 6 ...

Page 84: ...6 B079 B082 1 54 SM 1 13 2 BOOKLET FINISHER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE CAUTION Keep the power cord unplugged when starting the following procedure 1 Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes and shipping retainers B546I104 WMF B546I102 WMF ...

Page 85: ...e staple unit A 3 Remove the stapler unit lock plate B x 1 4 Push in the stapler unit and shut the front lower door 5 Remove the right lower cover C x 4 6 Remove the front pressure release bracket D x 1 7 Remove the rear pressure release bracket E x 1 8 Reattach the cover C B546I105 WMF B546I103 WMF C E A B D ...

Page 86: ... 1 56 SM 9 Set the hooks A of the shift tray B in the notches in the shift tray bracket and secure the tray with two M4 x 6 screws 10 Connect the shift tray sensor harness C 11 Install the harness cover D 2 hooks B546I106 WMF B546I107 WMF A B C D ...

Page 87: ...nstall the upper tray A 2 pins 13 Attach the sensor feeler B 2 pins 14 Remove the stand bracket C 15 Attach the rail D to the rail bracket E as shown 16 Install the rail bracket F on the left lower cover of the copier x 4 B546I108 WMF B546I921 WMF B546I801 WMF A B D E F C ...

Page 88: ...pier x 4 18 Secure the rail B to the booklet finisher with 1 M4 screw 19 Align the finisher on the joint bracket and lock the 2 hooks C of the finisher on the joint bracket 20 Connect the finisher cable D to the copier 21 Turn on the main switch and check the finisher operation B546I920 WMF B546I111 WMF A B C D ...

Page 89: ...essories against the following list Description Q ty 1 Front Joint Bracket 1 2 Rear Joint Bracket 1 1 3 Rear Joint Bracket 1 4 Grounding Plate 1 5 Copy Tray 1 6 Staple Position Decal 1 7 Screw M4 x 14 4 8 Knob Screw M4 x 10 1 9 Screw M3 x 8 1 10 Knob Screw M3 x 8 1 1 Rear joint bracket is not required for these models B408I502 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 6 7 10 ...

Page 90: ...ne power cord before starting the following procedure 1 The following options must be installed before installing this finisher Bridge Unit B538 Paper Tray Unit B542 2 Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes NOTE Be sure to keep screw A It will be needed to secure the grounding plate in Step 3 B408I102 WMF B408I103 WMF A ...

Page 91: ... 1 and the screw from the accessory box 4 Open the front door D then pull the locking lever E 5 Align the finisher on the joint brackets and lock it in place by pushing the locking lever 6 Secure the locking lever x 1 knob screw M3 x 8 7 Close the front door 8 Install the copy tray F x 1 knob screw M4 x 10 9 Connect the finisher cable G to the main machine below the right rear handle B408I503 WMF ...

Page 92: ...1000 SHEET FINISHER B408 B079 B082 1 62 SM 10 Attach the staple position decal A to the ARDF as shown 11 Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation B408I501 WMFF A ...

Page 93: ...he power cord and turn on the main switch 2 Enter the printer user mode and print the configuration page User Tools Printer Settings List Test Print Config Page NOTE The same data can also be printed by executing SP1 004 Print Summary All installed options are listed in the System Reference column ...

Page 94: ...ting the following procedure 1 Hold the key counter plates A on the inside of the key counter bracket B and insert the key counter holder C 2 Secure the key counter holder to the bracket x2 3 Attach the key counter cover D x2 4 Remove the connector cover E x1 5 Remove the knockout F from the connector cover A683I518 WMF B C D A E F ...

Page 95: ...cking of the double sided tape and attach the key counter assembly D to the left side of the scanner unit NOTE When attaching the key counter assembly press the assembly hard against the scanner cover Otherwise the key counter assembly may come off easily 11 Set User Tools System Settings Key Operator Tools and Key Counter Management to restrict access to each available function mode A683I003 WMF ...

Page 96: ...MENT AND ADJUSTMENT sections 3 9 1 and 3 9 2 2 Remove the rear cover A of the scanner unit x2 x1 3 Remove the knockout B 4 Push the 1st and 2nd scanners C to the right 5 Lift the harness guide D 6 Install the heater brackets E x2 M3x6 NOTE Use the screws already attached at the same position 7 Install the heater F x2 M4x6 and route the harness B004I204 WMF B004I205 WMF B004I206 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 97: ...er cover I x4 10 Remove knockout J 11 Pull out ac harness K 12 Connect the ac harness L to the ac outlet M NOTE Do not remove the ground wire from the ac outlet 13 Install the ac outlet 14 Install the ground wire N x1 M4x6 15 Re install the rear cover rear lower cover 16 Connect the harness O B004I208 WMF B004I209 WMF B004I210 WMF G H I J K L M N O ...

Page 98: ...eater bracket B 2 Install the harness holder C 3 Remove the rear lower cover 4 Remove the upper and lower paper trays from the main machine 5 Install the heater assembly D x1 6 Install the harness clamp E 7 Fasten the harness F with the clamp 8 Route the heater harness G and connect it to the ac harness H A284I531 WMF B004I203 WMF B004I202 WMF A B C D E G F H ...

Page 99: ... A to the heater bracket B 2 Install the harness holder C 3 Remove the rear lower cover of the machine and the rear cover of the optional paper tray unit 4 Remove the upper and lower paper trays of the optional paper tray unit 5 Install the heater assembly D x1 6 Install four harness clamps E 7 Route the harness F and connect it to the harness G and heater harness H A284I601 WMF B004I201 WMF B004I...

Page 100: ...MENT UNIT B443 B079 B082 1 70 SM 1 19 OPTIONAL USER ACCOUNT ENHANCEMENT UNIT B443 1 Remove the controller PCB 2 Install the user account enhancement unit NVRAM into IC 10 socket on the controller PCB 3 Re install the controller PCB ...

Page 101: ...PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ...

Page 102: ......

Page 103: ...hol Lubricate if necessary Platen Sheet Cover C I I I Dry cloth or alcohol Replace platen sheet if required Exposure Glass C C C Dry cloth or alcohol Toner Shield Glass C C C Optics cloth APS Sensor C C C Dry cloth or alcohol Exposure Glass Sheet through C C C Dry cloth or alcohol DRUM OPC AREA Charge Roller R R R Charge Roller Cleaning Roller R R R Drum Cleaning Blade 1 R R R Drum Cleaning Blade ...

Page 104: ...r By pass feed table I R R R Check counter value for each SP7 204 If 150 K replace roller After replacing the roller do SP7 816 to reset counter Paper Feed Guides C C C Water or alcohol Relay Rollers C C C Water or alcohol Bottom Plate Pad C C C Water or alcohol Bottom Plate Pad By pass feed C C C Water or alcohol Registration Sensor C C C Blower brush Paper Feed Roller Gear L L L Silicone Grease ...

Page 105: ...n below Exit Sensor C C C Blower brush DRIVE Drive Belts I Replace if necessary B541 EM 80K 160K 240K NOTE ARDF for originals Pick up Roller C R R R Belt cleaner Feed Belt C R R R Belt cleaner Separation Roller C R R R Dry or damp cloth Sensors C C C Blower brush Drive Gears L L L Grease G501 B542 EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE PAPER TRAY UNIT Paper Feed Rollers R R R Pick up Rollers R R R Separation Roll...

Page 106: ... Rollers C Water or alcohol Brush Roller A681 only I I I I Replace if required Discharge Brush C C C C Dry cloth Sensors C Blower brush Jogger Fences I I I I Replace if required Punch Waste Hopper I I I I Empty hopper Only for B545 B546 EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE BOOKLET FINISHER Transport Belt C C C Stapler Paddles C C C B544 EM 150K 300K 450K NOTE 1 BIN TRAY UNIT Rollers C Dry or damp cloth Copy Tra...

Page 107: ...REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ...

Page 108: ......

Page 109: ... screws that secure the LD drive board to the laser diode casing Doing so would throw the LD unit out of adjustment 2 Do not adjust the variable resistors on the LD unit as they are adjusted in the factory 3 The polygon mirror and F theta lenses are very sensitive to dust Do not open the optical housing unit 4 Do not touch the glass surface of the polygon mirror motor unit with bare hands 5 After ...

Page 110: ... Pin Laser Unit 1 N8036701 Flash Memory Card 4MB 1 N8031000 Case Flash Memory Card 1 A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin 4 pcs set 1 A2929500 Test Chart S5S 10 pcs Set 1 G0219350 Parallel Loopback Connector 1 3 2 2 LUBRICANTS Part Number Description Q ty A2579300 Grease Barrierta S552R 1 52039502 Silicone Grease G 501 1 3 2 3 SYMBOLS USED IN TEXT Screw Connector C clamp snap ring E clamp ...

Page 111: ...ont door 2 Front door Left pin A right pin B 3 4 DUPLEX UNIT 1 Connector cover A x1 2 Duplex connectors B x2 3 Duplex support arm C x1 4 Duplex unit D NOTE Grip the duplex unit with both hands slowly rotate it towards you and then lift up B004R951 WMF B004R003 WMF A B C D A B ...

Page 112: ...IGHT COVER NOTE Work carefully to avoid damaging the development roller 1 Duplex Unit 3 4 2 Transfer belt unit 3 13 1 3 Metal support arm A x1 4 Band support arm B loop fastener 5 Connector C x1 6 Upper right cover x1 Bushing x1 B004R915 WMF B C A ...

Page 113: ... 5 B079 B082 3 6 BY PASS TRAY 1 Duplex unit 3 4 2 Left cover A x1 3 Right cover B x1 4 Connectors C x2 5 By pass unit D x4 NOTE After removing the screws lift to unhook the by pass tray unit from the frame of the machine B004R952 WMF A B C D ...

Page 114: ...REAR COVERS B079 B082 3 6 SM 3 7 REAR COVERS 3 7 1 REAR UPPER COVER 1 Left corner cover A x2 2 Rear upper cover B x2 3 7 2 REAR LOWER COVER 1 Rear lower cover A x4 B004R953 WMF B004R954 WMF A B A ...

Page 115: ...Replacement Adjustment LEFT COVERS SM 3 7 B079 B082 3 8 LEFT COVERS 3 8 1 LEFT UPPER COVER 1 Rear left corner cover A x2 2 Left upper cover B x4 B004R955 WMF A B ...

Page 116: ...3 8 SM 3 9 SCANNER UNIT 3 9 1 ARDF 1 Interface connector 2 ARDF A x2 Push the ARDF towards the front of the machine to align the keyholes not shown of the ARDF base with the heads of the stud screws and lift B004R535 WMF A B ...

Page 117: ...POSURE GLASS 1 Open the ARDF or platen cover 2 Rear scale A x3 3 Left scale B x2 4 Exposure glass C 5 DF exposure glass D NOTE When reinstalling the DF exposure glass make sure that the white dot is positioned dot down at the rear left corner B004R959 WMF A B D C ...

Page 118: ...NEL 1 ARDF 3 9 1 2 Exposure glass and DF exposure glass 3 9 2 3 Operation panel A x2 x1 4 Operation panel base B x4 5 Rear cover C x4 Carefully lift in the direction of the arrow to disconnect the tab 6 Right cover D x3 7 Left cover E x2 B004R108 WMF B004R115 WMF A B C D E D ...

Page 119: ... DF exposure glass 3 9 2 3 Lens cover A x4 4 Flexible cable B x1 5 Lens block assembly C x4 NOTE The elements of the lens block assembly have been factory adjusted and paint locked at 8 points Do not attempt to replace these items Replace the unit 6 Perform scanner and printer copy adjustments 3 21 B004R512 WMF A B C ...

Page 120: ... B079 B082 3 12 SM 3 9 5 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS 1 ARDF 3 9 1 2 Exposure glass 3 9 2 3 Lens block 3 9 4 4 Original size sensor A x1 x1 5 Original size sensor B x1 x1 6 Original size sensor C x1 x1 B004R958 WMF A B C ...

Page 121: ...Operation panel A x2 x1 4 Slide 1st scanner B to the cutout to expose connector and screw 5 Exposure lamp C x1 x1 NOTE Never touch the glass surface of the exposure lamp with fingers Slide the exposure lamp toward the rear to disengage the tab on its base from the hole below and then lift out B004R105 WMF A B C D ...

Page 122: ...IT B079 B082 3 14 SM 3 9 7 SCANNER HP SENSOR PLATEN COVER SENSOR 1 ARDF 3 9 1 2 Scanner rear cover 3 9 3 3 Scanner HP sensor bracket A x1 4 Scanner HP sensor B x1 5 Platen cover sensor C x1 x1 B004R107 WMF A B C ...

Page 123: ...1 2 Scanner rear cover 3 9 3 3 Rear bracket A x5 x2 4 Scanner motor bracket B x3 x1 spring x1 timing belt x1 NOTE Loosen motor bracket B x3 to release tension on belt motor slides side to side 5 Scanner motor C x2 x1 6 Perform scanner and printer copy adjustments 3 21 B004R956 WMF A B C ...

Page 124: ... B082 3 16 SM 3 9 9 LAMP STABILIZER AND SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE BOARD 1 ARDF 3 9 1 2 Scanner rear cover 3 9 3 3 Rear bracket A x5 x2 4 Lamp stabilizer B x2 standbys x3 5 Scanner motor drive board C x2 x2 B004R960 WMF A B C ...

Page 125: ... 10 SCANNER WIRE 1 ARDF 3 9 1 2 Exposure glass 3 9 2 3 Scanner exterior panels and operation panel 3 9 3 Front wire 4 Left stay A x4 5 Right stay B x4 6 Front stay C x6 7 Front scanner rail D x2 8 To replace the scanner wire see page 3 19 B004R109 WMF A B C D ...

Page 126: ...SCANNER UNIT B079 B082 3 18 SM Rear wire 1 Scanner HP sensor bracket A x1 2 Scanner motor 3 9 8 3 Rear bracket B x9 4 Rear scanner rail C x2 5 Scanner drive pulley D x1 B004R961 WMF C D B A ...

Page 127: ...ion above shows the front wire 6 Pass the wire through the pulleys as shown in the illustration and then pass the bead end of the wire through the slot in the pulley 7 Turn the pulley until you see the red mark on the wire 2 turns and 6 turns see top illustration 8 Without allowing the wire to loosen tape the wire to the pulley 9 Pass the wire through 10 Complete threading the wire Tension spring ...

Page 128: ...e brackets B x2 3 Tighten tension bracket C x1 4 Secure scanner wire pulley D Allen screw x1 1 Remove the positioning tools After sliding the scanner to the right and left several times set the positioning tools to check the scanner wire bracket and tension bracket again 2 Reassemble the scanner and do the scanner and printer copy adjustments 3 21 B004R113 WMF B C D A A ...

Page 129: ...nd unplug the machine before attempting any of the procedures in this section Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes 3 10 1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS Two caution decals are located in the laser section as shown below See the next page for removal instructions A232R500 CDR LASER 1 WMF LASER 3 WMF LASER 2 WMF ...

Page 130: ... raise the toner bottle holder handle A 2 Front door pins B x 2 3 Inner cover C x 2 x 1 4 Shield glass cover D The shield glass cover holds the shield glass firmly in place and prevents it from accidental removal To remove on the left side press in the top leaf and pull off When re attaching the shield glass cover note that the top leaf lies on top of the plastic form 5 Shield glass E B079R211 WMF...

Page 131: ...6 Shield plate A x 2 7 Laser unit connectors B x 6 x1 flat cable NOTE Hold the LD board securely when disconnecting connectors 8 Laser unit C x 2 NOTE When sliding out the laser unit do not hold the LD board Hold the laser unit casing B079R900 WMF A B C ...

Page 132: ... POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR 1 Laser unit 3 10 2 2 Laser unit cover A x4 2 hooks 3 Polygon mirror motor B x4 x1 4 After replacing the motor do the image adjustment 3 21 B004R903 WMF B004R201 WMF B004R202 WMF A B B 45 cpm machine 35 cpm machine ...

Page 133: ...ization detector A x1 x1 3 10 5 LD UNIT 1 Laser unit 3 10 2 2 LD unit A x3 x1 NOTE To avoid damaging the LD board hold it securely when disconnecting the connectors Hold the laser unit casing 3 After replacing the LD board perform SP 2 109 to adjust the laser beam pitch described on the next page B004R206 WMF B004R513 WMF A A ...

Page 134: ...ttern write 144 the value of SP2 109 1 7 Change the value of SP2 109 1 and then print another test pattern repeating steps 2 to 4 Print about 5 patterns with different values for SP2 109 1 e g 48 96 192 240 8 Check these test patterns If the laser beam pitch is not correct the image looks like a black vertical stripe pattern NOTE For example if the pattern made with the value 192 has fewer obvious...

Page 135: ...atches any loose toner that may fall from the PCU as it is removed 4 Loosen B x 1 5 Rotate bracket C to the left 6 Raise the release lever D 7 Hold the PCU E as shown and pull it out of the machine NOTE If the right cover is to be left open cover the drum with paper or remove the PCU and cover it with paper Before you re install the PCU align the brackets on the PCU with the rails above and make s...

Page 136: ...disconnect the front spring C 5 On the right side of the PCU disconnect the spring D and attach it to hooks as shown To prevent breaking the weaker hook use a pair of needle nose pliers to disconnect the rear spring at then re attach to and Moving this spring retracts the movable drum cleaning blade so it does not touch the surface of the drum when the drum is re installed B079R902 WMF B079R711 WM...

Page 137: ...d re attach to CAUTION You must return re attach the front spring to in order for the cleaning blade to operate correctly If you fail to re attach the front spring to the movable cleaning blade will not contact the drum for cleaning but the machine will operate without generating an error However copies will gradually become dirty due to toner collecting on the drum 10 Re attach the rear spring on...

Page 138: ...pawl position adjustment If the pick off pawl has marked the drum with a line the pick off pawl position can be adjusted using either method Changing the spur position Changing the pick off pawl assembly position CAUTION After re assembly make sure that the front spring of the movable cleaning blade is re attached to the position 3 11 2 B079R907 WMF A B ...

Page 139: ...id touching the charge roller 5 Cleaning roller E NOTE Disengage the cleaning roller on the left to remove 6 After replacing the charge roller and cleaning roller check the value of SP2001 001 If it is not at the standard value 1450 V set SP2001 001 to 1450 V NOTE If this is not done the carrier will be attracted to the drum because the charge roller voltage will be too high CAUTION After re assem...

Page 140: ...1 Re installation Engage the left end of the cleaning blade first then make sure that both arms B and C are through the holes on the left and right side When you re attach the snap ring make sure that the head of the snap ring D is below the blade CAUTION After re assembly make sure that the front spring of the movable cleaning blade is re attached to the position 3 11 2 B079R712 WMF A B C D ...

Page 141: ... the drum 3 11 2 2 Remove the charge roller and cleaning roller 3 11 4 3 Remove the movable cleaning blade 3 11 5 4 Remove the stationary drum cleaning blade A x 2 CAUTION After re assembly make sure that the front spring of the movable cleaning blade is re attached to the position 3 11 2 B079R908 WMF A ...

Page 142: ...ps staples screws or any other metal objects 3 Loosen A x1 4 Rotate bracket B left 5 Development unit C NOTE Pull slowly to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller 6 Set the development unit on the spread paper 7 If you are temporarily installing a used development unit for test purposes perform SP2 220 and 2 802 1 after installation Chapter 5 Service Tables B004R500 WMF B004R401 WMF A ...

Page 143: ...r B NOTE Make sure that the surface with the red mark is facing up 4 Make sure that the ground plate C is positioned correctly 3 12 3 DEVELOPMENT ROLLER 1 Development unit 3 12 1 2 Upper development cover 3 12 2 3 Development roller A x2 NOTE Work carefully to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller B004R957 WMF B004R402 WMF B004R106 WMF A A B C ...

Page 144: ...ler NOTE Dispose of the used developer in accordance with local regulations Work carefully to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller 5 Pour approximately 1 3 of the developer C evenly along the length of the development unit 6 Rotate the drive gear D to work the developer into the unit Repeat steps 5 and 6 until all of the developer is in the unit and level with the edges B004R404 WMF ...

Page 145: ...s warmed up then perform the TD sensor initial setting using SP 2 801 NOTE When performing this setting cover the toner entrance hole with a piece of paper This prevents used toner falling from the PCU into the development unit during the TD sensor initial setting and interfering with the Vref setting toner density reference voltage 11 After performing the TD sensor initial setting remove the piec...

Page 146: ...attached to the casing with double sided tape Pry it off with the flat head of a screwdriver Use fresh double sided tape to re attach the sensor 4 Pour new developer into the development unit and perform the TD sensor initial setting using SP2 801 NOTE When performing the TD sensor initial setting cover the toner entrance hole with a piece of paper 3 12 4 B004R975 WMF A ...

Page 147: ...exposing the PCU drum to strong light cover it with paper if the right cover will be open for a long period 1 Lower the by pass tray open the duplex unit and open the right cover 2 Transfer unit A 1 hook 3 Transfer belt B springs x2 1 hook NOTE Avoid touching the transfer belt surface B004R501 WMF B004R522 WMF A B ...

Page 148: ...oid touching the transfer belt surface 2 Before installing the new transfer belt clean all the rollers and shafts with alcohol to prevent the belt from slipping 3 When reinstalling the transfer belt make sure that the belt is under the pin E 4 To avoid damaging the transfer belt during installation manually turn the rollers and make sure that the new transfer belt is not running over the edges of ...

Page 149: ...fer belt cleaning blade A x3 NOTE Avoid touching the edge of the new blade Check the new blade for dust or damage Toner Overflow Sensor 1 Transfer belt unit 3 13 1 2 Transfer belt 3 13 2 3 Transfer belt cleaning blade A x3 4 Turn over the transfer unit and empty the used toner in the transfer unit 5 Toner overflow sensor B x1 x3 NOTE Re install the color coded wires in the correct order B004R523 W...

Page 150: ... UP SEPARATION AND FEED ROLLERS 1 Paper tray 2 Pick up roller A 3 Feed roller B x 1 4 Separation roller C x 1 NOTE Do not touch the roller surface with bare hands After installing the new rollers do SP 7 816 for the appropriate paper tray B004R918 WMF A B C ...

Page 151: ... 2 LOWER RIGHT COVER 1 Duplex unit 3 4 2 By pass tray 3 6 3 LCT if installed 4 Lower right cover A x5 5 Vertical transport cover B NOTE Push the cover completely to the left and then press in on the right tab to release the peg from the hole B004R904 WMF A B ...

Page 152: ...LUTCHES 1 Rear lower cover 3 7 2 2 First paper feed clutch bracket A x2 bushing x1 3 Second paper feed clutch bracket B x2 bushing x1 4 Drive bracket C x1 spring x1 bearing x1 5 Relay clutch D x1 6 Upper paper feed clutch E x1 7 Lower paper feed clutch F x1 B004R973 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 153: ...5 B079 B082 3 14 4 UPPER PAPER FEED UNIT FOR TRAY 1 1 Upper paper tray 2 Right lower cover 3 14 2 3 Upper right cover 3 5 4 Upper paper feed clutch A 3 14 3 5 3 relay gears B 6 Upper paper feed unit C x2 x1 B004R910 WMF B004R911 WMF A B B B C ...

Page 154: ...WER PAPER FEED UNIT FOR TRAY 2 1 Lower the paper trays 2 Right lower cover 3 14 2 3 Remove the lower paper feed clutch A 3 14 3 4 Relay gears B x3 5 Cover C x2 6 Gear D x1 7 Lower paper feed unit E x2 x1 B004R913 WMF B004R974 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 155: ...FEED SM 3 47 B079 B082 3 14 6 PAPER END PAPER HEIGHT RELAY SENSORS 1 Appropriate paper feed unit 3 14 4 3 14 5 2 Paper height sensor A x1 3 Paper end sensor B x1 4 Relay sensor bracket C x1 x1 5 Relay sensor D B004R914 WMF A B C D ...

Page 156: ...Inner cover A x2 7 Front registration holder B x1 8 Front registration roller gear C x1 9 Registration roller bushing D Spring x 1 10 High voltage power supply board E x3 x6 11 Flywheel F x3 12 Right rear cover G x3 13 Right cover switch bracket H x1 14 Rear registration holder I x1 spring x1 15 Registration roller bushing J x1 B004R932 WMF B004R972 WMF B004R933 WMF A B C D E F G H I J ...

Page 157: ...stment PAPER FEED SM 3 49 B079 B082 16 Guide plate A and registration roller B spring x1 x 1 17 Registration guide plate C x2 x1 18 Sensor bracket D x1 19 Registration sensor E x1 x1 B004R934 WMF B004R935 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 158: ...PAPER FEED B079 B082 3 50 SM 3 14 8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR 1 Rear lower cover 3 7 2 2 Bracket A x2 3 Motor control board B x2 x13 4 Tray lift motor C x2 B004R964 WMF A B C ...

Page 159: ...B082 3 14 9 FEED DEVELOPMENT MOTOR 1 Rear lower cover x4 3 7 2 2 Rear upper cover x4 3 7 1 3 Tray lift motor 3 14 8 4 Support A x2 harnesses x2 5 Timing belt B Raise arm to release tension on belt 6 Feed development motor C x3 x2 B004R902 WMF A B C ...

Page 160: ...1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL 1 Open the front door duplex unit and right door 2 Set screw A x 1 3 Fusing unit release lever B 4 Slide out the fusing unit C NOTE A larger knob D is provided to make turning the hot roller easier to free jams The drawing of the larger knob was not updated in the remaining illustrations B079R611 WMF A B C D ...

Page 161: ...de A NOTE Press the guide to the left and then press on the right end to release the peg from the hole 3 15 3 HOT ROLLER STRIPPERS 1 Fusing unit 3 15 1 2 Fusing unit cover A x4 NOTE Note the positioning of the step screws x2 and the set screws x2 3 Hot roller strippers x7 springs x7 B004R601 WMF B004R602 WMF A A B ...

Page 162: ... 15 4 FUSING LAMPS 1 Fusing unit 3 15 1 2 Fusing unit cover 3 15 3 3 Fusing entrance guide A x2 4 Lower cover B x1 Left side 5 Two terminals C x2 6 Center fusing lamp lead D 3 clamps 7 Bracket E x1 B004R603 WMF B004R606 WMF A B D E C ...

Page 163: ...x2 NOTE To avoid breaking the fusing lamps handle them with care Avoid touching the lamps with your fingers Note the top bottom positioning of the fusing lamps as you remove them The sizes of the holes in the holder match the sizes of the ends of the 650 W lamp red and 550 W lamp brown 5 Remove both fusing lamps B004R607 WMF A B C D ...

Page 164: ...cover 3 15 3 3 15 4 3 Center thermistor A x1 x1 holder x1 4 End thermistor B x1 x1 holder x1 CAUTION The thermistors are thinly coated and extremely fragile Handle with care to avoid damaging them They should be replaced every 150K 5 Center thermostat C x2 6 End thermostat D x2 B004R605 WMF B004R604 WMF A B C D ...

Page 165: ...NIT SM 3 57 B079 B082 3 15 6 FUSING ROLLER PRESSURE ROLLER 1 Fusing unit 3 15 1 2 Fusing upper and lower cover 3 15 3 3 15 4 3 Fusing lamp 3 15 4 4 Springs x2 A both sides 5 Arms x2 B both sides 6 Pawl bracket C x4 B004R608 WMF A B C ...

Page 166: ...1 inch from both ends of the protective sheet on the new roller 2 Never touch the surface of the rollers 3 Work carefully to damaging the surface of the hot roller 4 The standard pressure roller spring position is the upper position 5 When reinstalling the hot roller assembly and pressure roller assembly make sure that the flange position of the bushings is as shown 6 When reinstalling the C rings...

Page 167: ... Adjustment FUSING UNIT SM 3 59 B079 B082 3 15 7 FUSING UNIT SIDE FAN 1 Open the duplex unit and right door 2 Release the transfer unit A and remove it 3 Remove the shaft cover B x 3 B079R909 WMF B079R713 WMF A B ...

Page 168: ...n connectors A x 1 NOTE When re connecting be sure the thread the connector correctly between the gaps 5 Close the right door 6 Use a short screwdriver to remove the fan plate B x 2 7 Pull the fan C out of the machine B079R714 WMF B079R715 WMF A B C ...

Page 169: ...SING UNIT CORNER FAN 1 Open the front door 2 Open the duplex unit and right door 3 Remove the fusing unit 3 4 1 4 Remove the magnet lock A of the front door x 2 5 Remove the fan bracket B x 2 6 Remove the fan C from the bracket x 2 B079R716 WMF B079R717 WMF A B C ...

Page 170: ... PAPER FEED 3 16 1 IDLE ROLLER DUST BLADE 1 Open the duplex unit and right door 2 Detach the dust blade A 3 Spread some paper on a flat surface and tap the dust blade gently to remove paper dust collected in its dust box B079R718 WMF A ...

Page 171: ...placement Adjustment SM 3 63 B079 B082 3 16 2 COVER REPLACEMENT 1 Rear cover A x1 2 Front cover B x1 3 Hinge cover C x1 4 Upper cover D x2 5 Close duplex unit and pull out upper cover B004R540 WMF B D A C ...

Page 172: ...REPLACEMENT 1 Upper cover 3 16 1 2 Lift up paper end feeler A to lock feeler in position NOTE Before reinstalling the upper cover return the paper end feeler to its original position 3 Replace the paper feed roller B x1 4 Replace pick up roller C B004R541 WMF C B A ...

Page 173: ...Replacement Adjustment SM 3 65 B079 B082 3 16 4 BY PASS SEPARATION ROLLER REPLACEMENT 1 Close by pass table 2 Remove separation roller A from the bottom x1 A689R502 WMF A ...

Page 174: ...UP SOLENOID REPLACEMENT 1 Upper cover 3 16 1 2 Lift paper end feeler A NOTE Before reinstalling the upper cover return the paper end feeler to its original position 3 Replace paper end sensor B x1 4 Pick up solenoid C x1 x1 spring x1 B004R543 WMF C B A ...

Page 175: ...M 3 67 B079 B082 3 16 6 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD REPLACEMENT 1 Hook A 2 Paper tray B x1 3 Size sensor board C NOTE To avoid breaking the hook of the paper size sensor board handle it carefully during removal B004R544 WMF C B A ...

Page 176: ...TABLE REMOVAL 1 Hinge cover 3 16 1 1 Harness A x1 2 Screws B x2 3 Retard spring bracket and remove the by pass table C CAUTION To relieve pressure on the spring during removal depress it as shown in the illustration B004R505 WMF A C B ...

Page 177: ...ement Adjustment SM 3 69 B079 B082 3 16 8 PAPER FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT 1 By pass tray 2 Paper feed unit A x2 x2 3 Rear bracket B x4 clip x1 bushing x1 4 Paper feed clutch C x1 A689R506 WMF A689R507 WMF A C B ...

Page 178: ...BLADE 1 Open the duplex unit and open the right door 2 Remove the PCU 3 11 1 3 Remove the development unit A 4 Press the top of the blade B to unlock it and open it to the left 5 Remove the dust blade C from the machine B079R910 WMF B079R719 WMF B C A ...

Page 179: ...Replacement Adjustment DUPLEX UNIT SM 3 71 B079 B082 3 17 DUPLEX UNIT 3 17 1 DUPLEX COVER REMOVAL 1 Duplex unit cover A x4 B363R101 WMF A ...

Page 180: ...DUPLEX UNIT B079 B082 3 72 SM 3 17 2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1 Duplex unit cover 3 17 1 2 Sensor holder A x1 3 Entrance sensor B x1 B004R102 WMF A B ...

Page 181: ...Replacement Adjustment DUPLEX UNIT SM 3 73 B079 B082 3 17 3 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1 Duplex unit 3 4 2 Sensor bracket A x1 3 Exit sensor B x1 B004R103 WMF A B ...

Page 182: ... CLUTCH 1 Rear upper cover not shown x2 2 High voltage supply board A x6 x3 NOTE Make sure that you re connect the wires in the correct order They are labeled 1 2 B C 3 Flywheel B x3 4 Registration clutch C x1 x1 5 Transfer belt contact clutch D x2 x2 B004R965 WMF B004R966 WMF B004R502 WMF A C D B ...

Page 183: ...eplacement Adjustment DRIVE AREA SM 3 75 B079 B082 3 18 2 MAIN MOTOR 1 Rear upper cover high voltage power supply flywheel 3 18 1 2 Timing belt A x1 3 Bracket B x3 4 Main motor C x2 x3 B004R907 WMF B A C ...

Page 184: ... door 2 Raise holder handle A 3 Push the holder lever B to the right 4 Stopper C 5 Toner bottle holder and bottle D 6 Motor harness E clamps x 2 7 Toner supply motor F hooks x2 x1 NOTE Press in on both sides of the motor to release it B004R921 WMF B004R922 WMF B C E F A D ...

Page 185: ...Replacement Adjustment PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS SM 3 77 B079 B082 3 19 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS 3 19 1 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY 1 Rear upper cover 3 7 1 2 High voltage power supply A x3 x6 B004R965 WMF A ...

Page 186: ...ver A x 4 2 Remove the IOB B All x 4 Ribbon cable x 1 3 The IOB is identical for the B079 B082 However the DIP switches are set differently for each machine Check the DIP switches then adjust settings as required See next page B079R911 WMF B079R720 WMF A B ...

Page 187: ... be DOWN OFF Do not change these settings This information is only for reference SW If set to ON 2 Switches off jam detection 3 Engine program recovery 4 Print output for debugging 5 Checking duplex function at the factory 3 SW 6 7 8 should be set for the area where the machine is used and serviced 6 7 8 Location OFF OFF OFF Japan ON OFF OFF North America OFF ON OFF Europe OFF OFF ON China ON OFF ...

Page 188: ...B079 B082 3 80 SM 3 19 3 BICU BOARD 1 I O Board 3 19 2 2 BICU board A x5 x all 3 19 4 PSU 1 Left upper cover 3 8 1 2 PSU A x4 x all B004R969 WMF B004R970 WMF A A ...

Page 189: ...for the B082 45 cpm must be installed in the B082 copier These controller boards are not interchangeable 1 Controller board A x 2 NOTE Use the wire handle to slide the HDD out of the expansion box 2 HDD unit bracket B x 3 x 2 3 HDD unit C x 4 NOTE Work carefully to avoid dropping or hitting the HDD After replacing the HDD execute SP 5853 to copy the stamp data from the firmware ROM to the new disk...

Page 190: ...t the test pattern for the following procedures 3 After completing these printing adjustments be sure to set SP 2 902 3 to 0 again Registration Leading Edge Side to Side 1 Check the leading edge registration and adjust it using SP1 001 Specification 3 2mm 2 Check side to side registration for each paper feed station and adjust with the following SP modes SP mode Specification 1st paper feed SP1 00...

Page 191: ...1 4 2 2 5 1 5 mm Leading edge SP2 101 1 3 2 mm Left edge SP2 101 3 2 1 5 mm Trailing edge duplex copy 2nd side SP2 101 5 1 2 2 mm Left edge duplex copy 2nd side SP2 101 6 0 3 1 5 mm Right edge duplex copy 2nd side SP2 101 7 0 3 2 5 1 5 mm Main Scan Magnification 1 Use SP2 902 3 5 Printing Test Pattern Single Dot Line to print a single dot pattern 2 Check magnification and then SP2 909 1 Main Scan ...

Page 192: ...rallelogram image appears If the parallelogram pattern appears perform the following procedure 1 Laser unit A 2 Bracket B x2 3 Install adjustment cam C P N A2309003 4 Secure positioning pin D P N A2309004 with the two screws removed with the bracket B Do not tighten the screws at this time 5 To adjust the position of the laser unit E 1 Adjust the laser unit position by turning the adjustment cam S...

Page 193: ...of the feed stations 2 Check the leading edge and side to side registration and adjust them with the following SP modes if necessary SP mode Leading Edge SP4 010 Side to side SP4 011 Magnification Use an OS S5S test chart to perform the following adjustment Sub Scan Magnification 1 Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations 2 Check the magnification ra...

Page 194: ... of the feed stations 3 Check the registration and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range SP6 006 1 Side to Side Registration 3 0 mm SP6 006 2 Leading Edge Registration Simplex 3 0 mm SP6 006 3 Leading Edge Registration Duplex Front 4 2 mm SP6 006 4 Leading Edge Registration Duplex Back 4 2 mm B004R511 WMF B A B004R508 WMF A Leading edge registration...

Page 195: ...s 5 times to open the Self Diagnostics menu 2 On the touch screen press Touch Screen Adjust or press 3 Use a pointed not sharp tool to press the upper left mark 4 Press the lower right mark after it appears 5 Touch a few spots on the touch panel to confirm that the marker appears exactly where the screen is touched If the mark does not appear where the screen is touched press Cancel and repeat fro...

Page 196: ......

Page 197: ...TROUBLESHOOTING ...

Page 198: ......

Page 199: ...et Procedure A To prevent damage to the machine the main machine cannot be operated until the SC has been reset by a service representative see the note below Enter SP mode and then turn the main power switch off and on B If the SC was caused by incorrect sensor detection the SC can be reset by turning the main power switch off and on Turn the operation switch and main power switch off and on C Th...

Page 200: ... or copying SIB or scanner motor drive board defective Scanner motor defective Harness between SIB and scanner drive motor disconnected Harness between SIB and scanner drive motor power source disconnected Scanner HP sensor defective Harness between SIB and scanner HP sensor disconnected Scanner wire timing belt pulley or carriage defective SBU defective 130 B Within 1 second after power on the SO...

Page 201: ...the LD unit Laser synchronization detector board out of position Laser synchronization detector board defective LD unit defective LD unit home position error 1 327 B The LD unit home position sensor does not detect an on condition when the LD unit moves to its home position HP sensor harness defective LD unit home position sensor defective LD positioning motor harness defective LD unit movement bl...

Page 202: ...connected or defective Polygonal mirror motor or polygonal mirror motor driver defective Polygonal mirror motor drive pulse is not output incorrectly GABIC cannot monitor XSCRDY signal ID sensor pattern test error 350 C One of the following ID sensor output voltages was detected twice consecutively when checking the ID sensor pattern 1 Vsp 2 5V 2 Vsg 2 5V 3 Vsp 0V 4 Vsg 0V ID sensor defective ID s...

Page 203: ... connection between the TD sensor and the I O board IOB I O board IOB defective Toner supply defective TD sensor error Auto adjust error 391 C During automatic adjustment of the TD sensor output voltage is less than 1 8V or more than 4 8V during TD sensor initial setting TD sensor abnormal TD sensor disconnected Poor TD sensor connection I O Board IOB defective Toner supply defective Development o...

Page 204: ... sensor is not activated after the tray lift motor has been on for 10 seconds If the main power switch is turned on when the paper is already at the feed height the paper height position is detected again At this time the paper height sensor should de activate within 5 seconds after the paper bottom plate starts to drop If it does not deactivate within 5 s four times consecutively a message will p...

Page 205: ...activated after the tray lift motor has been on for 13 seconds If the main power switch is turned on when the paper is already at the feed height the paper height position is detected again At this time the paper height sensor should de activate within 5 seconds after the paper bottom plate starts to drop If it does not deactivate within 5 s four times consecutively the tray lift motor halts After...

Page 206: ...or driver defective Fusing thermistor open 541 A The fusing temperature detected by the thermistor was below 7 C 44 6o F for 5 seconds or 2 seconds after reaching 45o C 113o F the temperature does not reach an additional 15o C 59o F after checking five times at 0 1 intervals Fusing thermistor disconnected Fusing thermistor connector defective Fusing thermistor damaged or warped Fusing temperature ...

Page 207: ...re closed Fusing unit is not installed Fusing unit connection loose 1 bin tray motor lock optional 1 bin tray unit 599 C A 1 bin tray motor lock signal is not detected for more than 300 ms during rotation 1 bin tray motor locked from overload 1 bin tray motor defective 1 bin tray motor connection loose Communication error between BICU and scanner unit 601 C Within 800 ms after power on after 3 att...

Page 208: ... BICU board and LCT main board connection defective or loose Optional paper feed unit interface board defective BICU board defective Communication timeout error between BICU and LCT 626 C The BICU cannot receive a response within 100 ms after 3 attempts after sending data to the LCT Serial line connecting BICU and LCT unit unstable External noise BICU board and LCT main board connection defective ...

Page 209: ...rror 691 A An error is detected in the FCI communication I2 C control register of the GABIC2 I2 C bus on BICU defective CDIC GAVD block I2 C bus error 692 A An error is detected in the CDIC communication I2 C control register of the GABIC2 I2 C bus on BICU defective ARDF original pick up malfunction 700 B After the pick up motor is turned on the original stopper HP sensor is not detected Original ...

Page 210: ...s turned on the stapler does not return to its home position within the specified time or the stapler HP sensor does not activate within the specified time after the stapler motor is turned on Stapler positioning motor defective or overloaded Stapler HP sensor defective Stapler positioning motor connection loose or connector defective Finisher exit guide open close motor error 731 B After the fini...

Page 211: ...gnal to the finisher board 2 The exit motor sensor does not send the clock signal to the finisher board for certain period while the exit motor is on Exit motor defective Exit motor sensor defective Upper exit plate movement error 03 1 The upper exit guide 2 switch does not turn on within 1s after the guide plate motor turns on 2 The upper exit guide sensor does not activate within 1s after the gu...

Page 212: ...n 15s after being turned on 2 The shift tray HP sensor does not activate within 15s after the tray lift motor turns on 3 The shift tray upper limit switch turns on while the shift tray is being raised 4 Lift motor sensors 1 2 do not send the clock signals to the finisher board every 200ms while the tray lift motor is on Tray lift motor defective Lift motor sensor 1 defective Lift motor sensor 2 de...

Page 213: ... HP sensor does not deactivate within 1 25s 2 After the positioning plate motor turns on to return the positioning plate to its home position the positioning plate HP sensor does activate within 1s Positioning plate motor defective Positioning plate HP sensor defective Folder roller motor error 02 1 The folder roller motor sensor doesn t send the clock pulse to the booklet unit board within a cert...

Page 214: ...staple hammer HP switch does not turn on within 0 5s after the rear stapler motor turns on during jam recovery Front stapler motor defective Front staple hammer HP switch defective Rear stapler motor defective Rear staple hammer HP switch defective Folder plate motor error 741 06 1 After the folder plate motor turns on to return the folder plate to its home position the folder plate HP sensor does...

Page 215: ... booklet exit cover sensor are all activated doors closed the lower door safety switch does not turn on within 1s after a copy job or warm up idling begins 3 When the booklet entrance guide sensor lower door sensor and booklet exit cover sensor are all activated doors closed the booklet exit cover safety switch does not turn on within 1s after a copy job or warm up idling begins Booklet entrance g...

Page 216: ...urned an error during the self diagnostic test Network interface board defective Controller board defective Self diagnostic Error NVRAM 824 B The resident non volatile RAM returned an error during the self diagnostic test NVRAM damaged or abnormal Backup battery has discharged NVRAM socket damaged Self diagnostic Error NVRAM Optional NVRAM 826 B The NVRAM or optional NVRAM returned an error during...

Page 217: ...LAN card not inserted into the wireless LAN board 854 Wireless LAN Error Card Error 2 B The board that holds the wireless LAN card can be accessed but the wireless LAN card 802 11b Bluetooth itself cannot be accessed while the machine is operating Wireless LAN card has been removed 855 Wireless LAN Error 3 Card Error 3 B An error is detected for the wireless LAN card 802 11b or Bluetooth Wireless ...

Page 218: ...rom either the operation panel or the network Software defective HDD defective 871 FCU Flash ROM Error B The address book written into the flash ROM mounted on the FCU is detected as defective Flash ROM device defective Replace flash ROM on the MBU 880 MLB Error B A request for access to the MLB Media Link Board was not answered within the specified time MLB defective Electronic total counter erro...

Page 219: ...ective BICU defective Connectors between BICU and controller loose or defective SIB defective Software write parameter setting error 986 C An unstable area at the storage destination in the settings table is set NULL for the parameter received by the write module Software defective Software performance error 990 B The software attempted to perform an unexpected operation Software defective Interna...

Page 220: ...defective An option required by the application RAM DIMM board is not installed Application start error 998 B After power on the application does not start within 60 s All applications neither start nor end normally Software defective An option required by the application RAM DIMM board is not installed Program download error The download program print data language data from the IC card does not ...

Page 221: ...Trouble shooting SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SM 4 23 B079 B082 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 222: ...there is toner in the development unit Toner Density TD S7 222 11 IOB Shorted SC390 01 is displayed Open The Paper Jam indicator will light whenever a copy is made Paper Exit S8 202 B2 IOB Shorted The Paper Jam indicator lights even if there is no paper Open The Paper Jam indicator lights even if there is no paper Registration S13 212 B2 IOB Shorted The Paper Jam indicator will light whenever a co...

Page 223: ... Symptom Open Doors Covers Open is displayed even if the right lower cover is closed Right Lower Cover SW1 216 4 IOB Shorted The LCD goes blank when the lower cover is opened Open The machine does not turn on Main SW3 102 1 4 PSU Shorted The machine does not turn off Open Doors Covers Open is displayed even if the front cover is closed Front Cover Safety SW4 107 1 PSU Shorted Doors Covers Open is ...

Page 224: ...ve Mode Off Off Off Controller LED Sequences LED 1 Red LED 2 Red System Startup including Self Diagnostics On Off Self Diagnostic Error On On Normal Operation Flashes Off Firmware Update Normal Execution Flashes Flashes Firmware Update Error Off Off Firmware Update Normal End On On NOTE LED 1 monitors Data Bus Bit 14 LED 2 monitors Data Bus Bit 15 4 5 TEST POINTS Controller Board Number Monitored ...

Page 225: ...SERVICE TABLES ...

Page 226: ......

Page 227: ...data change modes and adjust values Two service program modes are provided SP Mode Service Includes all the options in the SP displays for normal maintenance and adjustments SSP Mode Special Service Includes the normal SP modes and some additional options in the SP displays not required for normal settings and adjustments Most are marked DFU Design or Factory Use in the following tables Do not cha...

Page 228: ...u can enter the number Just press SP Mode if it is not highlighted Press twice to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal operation Press any Group number to open a list of SP codes and titles for that group For example to open the SP code list for SP1 nnn press Group1 If an SP has sublevels click the appropriate button to expand the list Press to scroll the display to the...

Page 229: ...and then press that number to expand the list 4 Use the center touch panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item that you want to set and press The small entry box on the right is activated and displays the default initial and the current setting below NOTE Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings 5 1 3 5 To enter a setting Press to toggle between plus and minu...

Page 230: ...ber set in bold italic denotes a Special Service Program mode setting that appears only after entering the SP mode by pressing and holding the on the 10 key pad and then the Copy SP on the touch screen B079 Denotes the 35 cpm model B082 Denotes the 45 cpm model DFU Denotes Design or Factory Use Do not change this value Japan only The feature or item is for Japan only Do not change this value LEF L...

Page 231: ...ation A setting causes more buckling 1 Trays 2 3 4 LCT 9 9 0 1 mm step 2 Duplex Tray 9 9 0 1 mm step 3 By pass Tray 9 9 0 1 mm step 1003 4 Tray1 Feed 9 9 1 1 mm step 5 By pass Thick Paper 9 9 2 1 mm step 1007 By pass Feed Paper Size Display Displays the paper width sensor data for the by pass feed table 5 75 Exit Junction Solenoid Start Timing Adjusts the timing of the solenoids at the entrance an...

Page 232: ...1 deg 45 cpm 120 200 175 1 deg 3 Center Bypass 35 cpm 120 200 170 1 deg 45 cpm 120 200 170 1 deg 4 End Bypass 35 cpm 120 200 170 1 deg 45 cpm 120 200 170 1 deg 5 Re load Temp Minus Roller Center 6 Re load Temp Minus Roller Ends Adjusts the temperature for re heating the hot roller Re load Temp Fusing Temp SP Value 0 60 30 1 step Note The re load temperature is the print ready temperature When the ...

Page 233: ...Paper Reverse Timing Duplex Adjusts the timing for stopping the rotation of the reverse roller after the trailing edge of the paper passes the duplex entrance sensor 5 5 0 mm 1 mm step Adjust the timing if paper frequently jams at the inverter gate in the duplex unit Motor Speed Adjustment Adjusts the speeds of the main motor feed development motor and fusing exit motor 1 Main Motor 2 Feed Develop...

Page 234: ...ge roller voltage decreases by 30 V absolute value 0 1 1 0 0 90 0 05 step 3 Charge Roller Voltage Adjustment 1 Adjusts the lower limit value for charge roller voltage correction 1000 2000 1450V 10V step 4 Charge Roller Voltage Adjustment 2 Adjusts the upper limit value for charge roller voltage correction 1000 2000 2000V 10V step 2005 5 Charge Roller Voltage Step Adjusts the correction voltage adj...

Page 235: ...acing the LD unit or replacing or clearing NVRAM use this SP and SP2 109 3 to adjust the laser beam pitch 2 600 dpi Adjusts the laser beam pitch value for 600 dpi resolution 600 dpi 30 284 168 1 pulse step After replacing the LD unit or replacing or clearing NVRAM use this SP and SP2 109 4 to adjust the laser beam pitch 3 400 dpi Initial Setting Initializes the laser beam pitch for 400 dpi using t...

Page 236: ...wever if the machine enters the energy saver mode the polygon motor will ignore the zero setting and switch itself off 0 60 s 10 s 5 s step Development Bias Adjustment 1 Development Bias Adjusts the development bias for copying Use as a temporary measure to correct faint copies from an aging drum 200 700 510V 10V step 2201 2 ID Sensor Pattern Adjusts the development bias for the ID sensor pattern ...

Page 237: ...s After Toner Near End Selects the number of copies that can be printed once the copier has detected toner near end Select 1 or 2 if the customer normally makes copies of high density 0 90 copies 1 No copies 2 10 copies Vref Manual Setting Adjusts the TD sensor reference voltage Vref 1 0 5 00 V 4 00V 0 01V step 2220 Change this value after replacing the development unit with another unit that cont...

Page 238: ...m Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum properly in high humidity and high temperature conditions B082 20 100µA 60 1µA step 6 Bypass Feed 35 cpm Copying from the by pass tray image area for the B079 35 cpm B079 20 100µA 35 1µA step 2301 7 Leading Edge Bypass Feed 35 cpm Copying at the leading edge of paper fed from the by pass tray for the B079 35 cpm B079 20 100µA 45 1µA step T...

Page 239: ...output manually for the following 1 VTS Adjusts the TD sensor output VT Change this value after replacing the development unit with another one that already contains toner For example when using a development unit from another machine for test purposes To adjust VT use a similar procedure as for SP2 220 1 00 5 00V 4 78V 0 02V step 2 VTMAX Adjusts the maximum value for SP2 802 1 1 00 5 00V 4 78V 0 ...

Page 240: ...5 1 Process Control Setting By pass Adjusts the charge roller voltage for the following items 1 Cα Adjusts the charge roller voltage used when paper with a small width is fed from the by pass tray The paper width below which the correction starts depends on the value of SP2 309 1 Use this SP when an image problem such as white spots at the center of black dots or breaks in thin black lines occurs ...

Page 241: ...blade to bend or scour the surface of the belt LD PWM Selection 1 Printer Output LD PWM Selection Changes the LD power PWM control for printed copies A smaller value produces a lighter image Use this SP to adjust the image density for printing from a personal computer or printing a received fax message 1 87 5 2 75 3 62 5 2969 2 Fax Output LD PWM Selection Changes the LD power PWM control for print...

Page 242: ...s after near end detected SP2213 2976 1 Toner Bottle On Count Displays the total ON time of the toner supply motor calculated from when the toner bottle was replaced Use this to check that the toner end count SP2975 is working properly 0 2 000 000 0 1 ms step When SP2975 is set to any value other than 0 this value is displayed when it matches the setting of SP2975 When SP2975 is set to 0 SP2976 is...

Page 243: ...ed and an SC code is generated If the ID sensor does not detect the bare area of the drum VSP 0 0 V VSG 0 0 V is displayed and an SC code is generated Fuser Cleaning Toner and carbon clinging to the hot roller strippers can cause poor print quality To prevent this toner and carbon are dislodged from the hot roller strippers in two ways 1 jogging the fusing feed out motor 3 times after every print ...

Page 244: ...g items Do not adjust unless the customer desires a scanner margin greater than the printer margin 1 Leading Edge Adjusts leading edge erase margin for sub scanning Specification 3 2 mm 0 9 1 0 0 1 mm step 2 Trailing Edge Adjusts trailing edge erase margin for sub scanning Specification 2 2 mm 0 9 0 5 0 1 mm step 3 Right Adjusts right margin for main scanning Specification 2 5 1 5 mm 0 9 0 5 0 1 m...

Page 245: ...1 0 8k 16k not detected Non standard size 1 8K 16K paper size detect enabled Other areas 0 1 0 1 0 8k 16k not detected Non standard size 1 8k 16k not detected Non standard size 4307 APS Sensor Output Display Determines whether or not the original size is detected while the exposure lamp lights during initialization 0 1 1 1 step 0 Original size detection at power on disabled 1 Original size detecti...

Page 246: ...lter processing for fax mode 3 Conducts fax Text mode OR processing for main scan for resolution below 100 dpi Pre filter processing is done in every mode except Fax Text mode 10 Pre Filter Text Selects the filter processing setting for smoothing in order to reduce the incidence of moiré in images Specifically it sets 1 the compression rate for parallel lines in the main scan direction and for lon...

Page 247: ...lter coefficient for the text mode in the sub scan direction 0 13 13 1 step 6 2 Image Processing 22 Main Filter Strength Text 25 64 Selects the MTF filter strength in the main scan direction for the text mode 0 7 2 1 step 6 2 Image Processing 23 Sub Filter Strength Text 25 64 Selects the MTF filter strength in the sub scan direction for the text mode 0 7 2 1 step 6 2 Image Processing 24 Main Filte...

Page 248: ...t 257 400 Selects the MTF filter coefficient for the sub scan direction in the text mode 0 13 13 1 step 6 2 Image Processing 34 Main Filter Strength Text 257 400 Selects the MTF filter strength for the main scan direction in the text mode 0 7 2 1 step 6 2 Image Processing 35 Sub Filter Strength Text 257 400 Selects the MTF filter strength for the sub scan direction in the text mode 0 7 2 1 step 6 ...

Page 249: ...arance of text and lines but selecting a higher setting can cause moiré in photographs created with dots newspaper and magazine photos 40 Text Photo All Coefficient 25 64 Selects the filter coefficient that affects the clarity in reproduction of an entire page copied in the Text Photo mode and enlarged in the range 25 to 64 A higher setting increases effect of this adjustment and a lower setting d...

Page 250: ...nd lines it could increase the incidence of moiré in images shaded with dots newspapers magazines etc 0 7 1 1 step 0 Off 1 Softest 7 Sharpest 6 2 Image Processing 48 Text Photo All Coefficient 155 256 Selects the MTF filter applied to improve the clarity of the entire image within 155 256 magnification in the Text Photo mode While this SP can improve the appearance of low contrast text it can also...

Page 251: ... the appearance of low contrast originals a very high setting can also increase the incidence of moiré 0 6 6 1 6 2 Image Processing 56 Filter Strength Light Original Selects the MTF filter strength to improve the contrast of originals scanned in the Pale mode While selecting a larger number strengthens the effect of the filter to improve contrast a very high setting can increase the incidence of m...

Page 252: ... Photo Selects the independent dot erase level for originals scanned the Text Photo mode While selecting a higher setting erases more dots setting a very high setting can cause very fine text or other detail to fade or drop out completely 0 15 0 1 step 0 Off 1 Weakest fewest dots erased 15 Strongest most dots erased 63 Independent Dot Erase Light Original Selects the independent dot erase level fo...

Page 253: ...ound Erase Level Light Original Adjusts the threshold for background erase in originals scanned in the Pale mode A higher setting reduces more dirty background but a very high setting can cause the image to reverse or cause other unexpected results 0 255 0 1 step 0 Off 69 Background Erase Level Generation Copy Adjusts the threshold for background erase in originals scanned in the Generation Copy m...

Page 254: ...ng can increase the incidence of moiré 0 3 3 1 6 2 Image Processing 4903 80 Filter Adj Text Photo Edge Det 25 64 Selects the MTF filter coefficient of the edge detection level of the filter setting selected with SP4903 039 to adjust the clarity of edges in images copied in the Text Photo mode and enlarged in the range 25 to 64 A lower setting increases the number of edges detected and a higher set...

Page 255: ... the Text Photo mode and enlarged in the range 65 to 154 A higher setting increases the strength of the effect and a lower setting decreases the effect While a higher setting can improve the clarity of text and thin lines a very high setting can increase the incidence of moiré 0 3 3 1 6 2 Image Processing 4903 83 Filter Adj Text Photo Edge Det 65 154 Selects the MTF filter coefficient of the edge ...

Page 256: ... Text Photo mode and enlarged in the range 155 to 256 A higher setting increases the strength of the effect and a lower setting decreases the effect While a higher setting can improve the clarity of text and thin lines a very high setting can increase the incidence of moiré 0 3 3 1 6 2 Image Processing 4903 86 Filter Adj Text Photo Edge Det 155 256 Selects the MTF filter coefficient of the edge de...

Page 257: ...ied in the Text Photo mode and enlarged in the range 257 to 400 A higher setting increases the strength of the effect and a lower setting decreases the effect While a higher setting can improve the clarity of text and thin lines a very high setting can increase the incidence of moiré 0 3 3 1 6 2 Image Processing 89 Filter Adj Text Photo Edge Det 257 400 Selects the MTF filter coefficient of the ed...

Page 258: ...4903 036 that adjusts the edge clarity of images scanned in the Photo mode While selecting a higher setting can improve the clarity of text and lines selecting a very high setting can increase the incidence of moiré 0 3 2 1 0 Weakest 3 Strongest 6 2 Image Processing 92 Filter Adj Photo Edge Det Selects the MTF filter coefficient of the edge detection level of the filter setting selected with SP490...

Page 259: ... Dithering and smoothing This setting is the same as the setting for Print Photo selected on the operation panel in Photo Mode Dithering can be adjusted with SP4903 037 1 Error diffusion and MTF filter processing This setting is the same as the setting for Normal or Glossy Photo selected on the operation panel in Photo Mode Error diffusion can be adjusted with SP4903 036 and 038 Selects the size o...

Page 260: ...ct especially before starting a large copy job 0 3 0 1 step 0 Edge threshold pattern is used 1 Texture Pattern matrix 0 is used 2 Texture Pattern matrix 1 used 3 Texture Pattern 2 matrix used 8 Gray Adj Text Photo Edge Det 25 64 Adjusts the degree of edge detection to improve image quality originals scanned in the Text Photo Mode in a range of magnification of 25 to 64 The method of error diffusio...

Page 261: ...usion executes on text to create sharp lines to better define text characters but in other areas error diffusion executes grayscale processing for photographs Select a lower setting for better reproduction of photographs and a higher setting for sharper text 0 15 8 1 0 Decreasing the setting approaching 0 improves the appearance of photographs but can cause text and thin lines to drop out 15 Incre...

Page 262: ...de at magnification within 25 64 The selections are stepped to allow gradual adjustments from prioritizing reproduction of pictures shaded with dot patterns newspapers magazines etc with less moiré to prioritizing low contrast fine lines and text Select a lower setting to prioritize reproduction of pictures without moiré and select a higher setting to prioritize reproduction of text and thin lines...

Page 263: ...mage quality of originals copied in Text Mode at magnification within 257 400 The selections are stepped to allow gradual adjustments from prioritizing reproduction of pictures shaded with dot patterns newspapers magazines etc with less moiré to prioritizing low contrast fine lines and text Select a lower setting to prioritize reproduction of pictures without moiré and select a higher setting to p...

Page 264: ...de and magnified in the range 65 154 These selections are stepped to allow adjustment in gradual stages from prioritizing reproduction of pictures with less moiré to prioritizing text Select a lower setting to prioritize reproduction of pictures without moiré and select a higher setting to prioritize reproduction of sharp text 0 10 0 1 0 Off 1 Pictures highest priority 10 Text highest priority 6 2...

Page 265: ...lines and text Select a lower setting to prioritize reproduction of pictures without moiré and select a higher setting to prioritize reproduction of text and thin lines 0 13 0 1 0 Off 1 Pictures highest priority 13 Text thin lines highest priority 6 2 Image Processing 30 Generation General Quality Allows adjustment with other SP codes to improve the overall quality of images in originals scanned i...

Page 266: ...al operation 1 Grayscale through processing 2 Gamma correction through processing 3 Printer gamma grayscale through processing 20 Image Data Path Printer Forces switching of the data output format between writing for the Ri10 CDIA for testing DFU 0 3 0 1 0 Normal operation 1 Sets output from the Ri10 to the CDICA for grayscale output 1 pixel 8 bits 2 Sets output from the Ri10 to the write unit for...

Page 267: ...s SP if the customer cannot attain clean copies after performing automatic density adjustment 5112 Non Standard Paper Selection Determines whether a non standard paper size can be initialized for copying or not 0 No 1 Yes If is selected a non standard size can be input using the UP mode 5113 Selects the corresponding key for installed devices such as a coin lock Japan only 0 5 0 1 step 0 None 1 Ke...

Page 268: ...plication screen is switched with a hardware switch or software switch 0 1 0 1 5212 Page Stamp 3 Duplex Printout Right Left Position Determines how horizontal printing is executed during duplex printing Sets the upper right corner of the front side and the upper left corner of the backside so the starting points for horizontal printing are the same on both sides DFU 10 10 0 1 mm step 10 Extreme ri...

Page 269: ...l call on off for the paper supply DFU 0 Off 1 On 0 No alarm 1 Sets the alarm to sound for the specified number transfer sheets for each paper size A3 A4 B4 B5 DLT LG LT HLT 2 Staple Supply Alarm Switches the control call on off for the stapler installed in the finisher Japan only 0 Off 1 On 0 No alarm 1 Alarm goes off for every 1K of staples used 3 Toner Supply Alarm Switches the control call on ...

Page 270: ...unt Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call 02 10 5 1 This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is enabled set to 1 13 Door Open Time Length Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a call 03 30 10 1 This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is enabled set to 1 21 Jam Operation Time Length Determines what happens when a paper ja...

Page 271: ...nsors and switches 5 1 5 5804 Output Check Turns on the electrical components individually for test purposes 5 1 6 Option Connection Check 1 ARDF 2 Bank Paper Tray Unit 3 LCT 5807 4 Finisher 1000 sheet Two Tray finisher Checks the connectors to the optional peripheral devices Execution will return either a 1 or 0 0 Device not connected correctly 1 Device connected correctly 5811 1 Machine Serial N...

Page 272: ...ep the front cover open This prevents a software module accessing the NVRAM during the upload 5825 NVRAM Data Download Downloads the content of a flash memory card to the NVRAM on the control board 5828 Network Setting 12 Device Name Displays the device name used by the network in the format RNPxxx up to 48 characters 66 Job Spooling Clear Start Time This SP determines whether jobs spooled but not...

Page 273: ...cycle the machine off and on 5833 Job Log Transfer On Off Setting Switches the job log transfer on off for Poplar server 0 Off disable 1 On enable 5834 Enable Operation Panel Image Settings Enables and disables the operation panel read dump feature After powering on the machine set this option to 1 to enable this feature 0 Off disable 1 On enable To reset the machine to 0 the machine must be turne...

Page 274: ...erver via the MLB 0 2 0 1 0 1 to 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 Enabled only when optional MLB Media Link Board is installed 73 Magnification for Copy B W Other Sets the default magnification for stored documents other than black and white sent to the document management server via the MLB 0 2 0 1 0 1 to 1 1 1 2 2 1 4 Enabled only when optional MLB Media Link Board is installed 74 Magnification for Printer Color S...

Page 275: ... Media Link Board is installed 82 Format for Copy B W Text Sets the default format for stored copy black and white text documents sent to the document management server via the MLB 0 3 1 1 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR Enabled only when optional MLB Media Link Board is installed 83 Format Copy B W Other Sets the default format for stored other than black and white documents sent to th...

Page 276: ... JPEG Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management server via the MLB with JPEG selected as the format 5 95 50 1 Enabled only when optional MLB Media Link Board is installed IEEE 1394 4 Host Name Enter the name of the device used on the network Example RNP0000000000 7 Cycle Master Enables or disables the cycle master function for the 1394 bus standard 0 1 1 1 0 Disabl...

Page 277: ... during login Login refusal on arrival of login request and the initiator forces the login 12 Login Enables or disables the exclusive login feature SBP 2 related 0 1 0 1 0 Disables The exclusive login LOGIN ORB exClusvie it is ignored 1 Enables Exclusive login is in effect 5839 13 Login MAX Sets the maximum number of logins from the initiator 6 bits 0 63 8 1 0 Reserved 63 Reserved IEEE 802 11b 4 S...

Page 278: ... is installed Supply Name Setting Allows setting the following items with the Soft Keyboard after pressing the Soft Keyboard button displayed for this SP code The items you enter are displayed after pressing User Tools and then pressing the Inquiry button on the touch panel display 1 Toner Name Setting Black Enter the name of the toner in use 5 Staple Standard Enter the name of the staples in use ...

Page 279: ... or SMTP server 60 900 300 1 4 Number of Retries Determines the number of retries before the machine returns to standby after an error occurs during an image transfer with the delivery or SMTP server 0 99 3 1 5 Capture Server IP Address Sets the capture server IP address for the capture function eCabinet UC1 0 0xFFFFFFFF 0x00 MLB2 is required to use this feature 6 Delivery Error Display Time Netfi...

Page 280: ...ssible Bit 5 1 Mail Rx confirmation possible Bit 4 1 Address book auto update Bit 3 1 Fax Rx function 0 255 0 2 6 Delivery Server Retry Timer Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery server address book 0 255 0 1 7 Delivery Server Retry Times Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery server address bo...

Page 281: ...off 0000 OFF 4 User Directory Lower 4 Bits Switches access control on and off 0000 OFF 5 Delivery Input Lower 4 Bits Switches access control on and off 0000 OFF 6 Access Control Lower 4 Bits Switches access control on and off 0000 OFF 5848 100 Repository Max Size of Download Image Sets the maximum size allowed for downloaded images The default is equal to 1 gigabyte 1 1024 1024 1K Installation Dat...

Page 282: ...test 4 MB of the debug log on the HDD to the IC card This function erases all data from the IC card as it copies 8 HDD to IC Card Latest 4MB Any Key Copies the latest 4 MB of the debug log on the HDD to the IC card but only those portions of the log specified with a key specified with SP5859 Debug Save Key No This function erases all data from the IC card as it copies To enable this SP the machine...

Page 283: ...on Checks whether the mechanical counter inside the inner cover is connected or not Display 0 Not detected 1 Detected 2 Unknown 5918 A3 DLT Counter Display Sets the key press display for the counter key 0 1 0 This setting has no relation to SSP SP5 104 A3 DLT Double Count 5923 Border Removal Area Switching Toggles between two settings that affect the appearance of the pages for border removal and ...

Page 284: ... key 1 On 8 kai 16 kai paper sizes displayed after pressing the selection key For this setting to take effect 2 must be selected for SP5131 With 2 Europe selected for SP5131 the ADF can select 16 kai LEF With SP5962 set for 0 Off the nearest size is detected as shown below Size Loaded Size Detected 16 kai SEF B5 SEF 16 kai LEF B5 LEF 5962 8K 16K Paper Mode 8 kai SEF B4 LEF 5970 Debug Serial Output...

Page 285: ...f the ARDF 5 1 5 6007 3 Group 3 6008 ADF Output Check Switches on each electrical component ARDF motor solenoid etc of the ARDF for testing 5 1 6 DF Free Run 1 Duplex Mode 6009 2 Stamp Mode Performs a free run with the ARDF for duplex and stamp testing Input the number for the item you want to check and then press On twice to start This is a general free run controlled from the copier For more det...

Page 286: ... two tray finisher 3 5 3 5 0 0 0 5 mm step Press to toggle A larger value shifts the staple toward the edge of the paper Punch Hole Adjustment Adjusts the punch hole position 7 7 0 0 5 mm steps Press to toggle A larger value shifts the holes toward the edge of the paper 1 2 Holes 2 hole punches for Japan North America Europe and 4 hole punches for Northern Europe 6113 2 3 Holes 3 hole punches for ...

Page 287: ...elected item Print Counter 1 Total Counter 2 Copier 3 Fax 4 Printer 7003 5 Others Select a number to display the total print count for the selected item C O P O Counter 1 C O Copies Original 7006 2 P O Prints Original Displays the number of copies per original when making more than 10 copies For example if you make 15 copies of a 3 page original document for a total of 45 sheets then the counter w...

Page 288: ... Paper Tray Unit Option 5 LCT Large Capacity Tray Option 7204 6 By Pass Copier 7205 Total ADF Counter Displays the total number of originals fed by the ARDF Staple Counter 1 Normal Staple 7206 2 Booklet Staple Display the total number of staples fired 7209 Punch Displays the total times the punch has fired Copy Count Magnification 1 Reduce 25 49 2 Reduce 50 99 3 Full Size 4 Enlarge 101 200 5 Enlar...

Page 289: ... Copy Counter Set Number 1 1 to 1 2 1 to 2 5 3 1 to 6 10 4 1 to 11 20 5 1 to 21 50 6 1 to 51 100 7 1 to 101 300 7305 8 1 to 301 Over Displays the total number of prints for multiple copy jobs Job Counter Copy Mode 1 Sort 2 Staple 3 Punch 4 Reserve Copy 7306 5 Check Copy Displays the total number of prints based on the job mode Document Server Scan Storage 7320 1 Scanning Count Displays the origina...

Page 290: ... Print Job Counter 1 Duplex 2 Sort 3 Staple 4 Punch 5 Check Copy 7324 6 Print 1st Page Displays the number of jobs classed by job content Document Server Job Counter Page Number 1 1 page 2 2 pages 3 3 5 pages 4 6 10 pages 7325 5 over 11 pages Displays the number of print jobs classed by size of the job Document Server Job Counter File Number 1 1 file 2 2 5 files 3 6 10 files 7326 4 over 11 files D...

Page 291: ...nt service calls successive groups of 10 7502 Total Paper Jam Counter Displays the total number of copy jams Display range 0000 9999 7503 Total Original Jam Counter Displays the total number of original jams Display range 0000 9999 Paper Jam Counter by Jam Location Displays the total number of copy jams by location Display range 0000 9999 A Paper Late error occurs when the paper fails to activate ...

Page 292: ...Staple Stitch 40 Ent Fin Off 7504 41 Exit Fin Off Total Original Jam by Location Displays the total number of original jams by location These jams occur when the original does not activate the sensors A Paper Late error occurs when the paper fails to activate the sensor at the precise time A Paper Linger paper jam occurs when the paper remains at the sensor for longer than the prescribed time 1 At...

Page 293: ...he paper size code in hex TOTAL is the total jam error count SP7 003 DATE is the date the previous jam s occurred Paper Size Code hex A4 LEF 05 A5 LEF 06 B5 LEF 0E LT LEF 26 HLT LEF 2C A3 SEF 84 A4 SEF 85 A5 SEF 86 B4 SEF 8D B5 SEF 8E DLT SEF A0 LG SEF A4 LT SEF A6 HLT SEF AC 7507 Others FF Original Jam History 1 Last 2 Last 1 3 Last 2 4 Last 3 5 Last 4 6 Last 5 7 Last 6 8 Last 7 9 Last 8 7508 10 ...

Page 294: ...nter Reset Magnification Resets all counters of SP7 301 Copy Count Magnification 7825 Total Counter Reset No longer used Executing this SP has no effect This SP is no longer required because the counter initialized set to 0 at the factory 7826 MF Device Error Count This display is for the Japanese version only Japan Only 7827 MF Device Error Count Clear This SP is for the Japanese version only Cle...

Page 295: ...ss Execute to clear counter SP7320 Doc Svr Scan Count 7841 Doc Svr Original Size Clear Press Execute to clear counter SP7321 Doc Svr Original Size Display 7842 Doc Svr Print Size Clear Press Execute to clear counter SP7323 Doc Svr Print Size Display 7843 Doc Svr Print Job Counter Clear Press Execute to clear counter SP7324 Doc Svr Print Job Counter 7844 Doc Svr Job Count Page No Clear Press Execut...

Page 296: ...n select the settings for the test print paper size etc 5 Press Start twice Ignore the Place Original messages to start the test print 6 Press SP Mode highlighted to return to the SP mode display Test Pattern Table SP2 902 2 IPU Test Print No Test Pattern No Test Pattern 0 None 8 Grayscale Horizontal 8 1 Vertical Line 1 dot 9 Grayscale Vertical 8 2 Horizontal Line 1 dot 10 Cross Pattern 8 3 Vertic...

Page 297: ... 6 Grid Pattern 1 dot pair 26 Grayscale Vertical 7 not used 27 Grayscale Vertical Horizontal 8 not used 28 Grayscale Grid 9 Full Dot Pattern 29 Grayscale Horizontal Extension 10 Black band 30 Grayscale Vertical Extension 11 Trimming Area 31 Grayscale Horizontal Margin 12 Trimming Area 2 dot 32 Grayscale Vertical Margin 13 Argyle Pattern 33 Grayscale Vertical Horizontal Margin 14 Argyle Pattern 2 d...

Page 298: ...r 3 Activated Deactivated 1 Paper Size Sensor 2 Activated Deactivated 1 Paper Feed 1 Upper Tray 0 Paper Size Sensor 1 Activated Deactivated 7 Duplex Unit Set Sensor Unit set Unit not set 6 Near End Sensor 2 Off On 5 Near End Sensor 1 Off On 4 Fusing Paper Output Motor Lock Not Locked Locked 3 Paper Size Sensor 4 Activated Deactivated 2 Paper Size Sensor 3 Activated Deactivated 1 Paper Size Sensor ...

Page 299: ... Cover Switch Switch pressed cover closed Switch not pressed 5 Relay Unit Bridge Unit 0 Right Cover Switch Switch pressed cover closed Switch not pressed 7 Feed Motor Lock No Yes 6 F Gate Signal Active Not active 5 Height Sensor Feed height Not feed height 4 Paper Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 3 Fusing Unit Detected Not detected 2 Total Counter Not detected Detected 1 Key Counter D...

Page 300: ...ot detected 2 Entrance Sensor Jam Paper detected Paper not detected 1 Paper End Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 9 Duplex Unit 0 Duplex Unit Switch Cover closed Cover open 7 Tray 4 Bit 1 8 Tray 4 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 0 Capacity 5 Tray 3 Bit 1 1 1 Full 4 Tray 3 Bit 0 1 0 50 or more 3 Tray 2 Bit 1 0 1 10 or more 2 Tray 2 Bit 0 0 0 Out or tray not set 1 Tray 1 Bit 1 10 Remainder of Feed Tray 1 0 T...

Page 301: ...ay Full 7 Mailbox 7 bin Not full or no tray Full 6 Mailbox 6 bin Not full or no tray Full 5 Mailbox 5 bin Not full or no tray Full 4 Mailbox 4 bin Not full or no tray Full 3 Mailbox 3 bin Not full or no tray Full 2 Mailbox 2 bin Not full or no tray Full 1 Mailbox 1 bin Not full or no tray Full 13 Full Exit Tray 2 0 Mailbox Proof Tray Not full or no tray Full Table 1 By pass Feed Table Paper Size D...

Page 302: ...ginal width sensor 2 Paper not detected Paper detected 4 Original width sensor 1 Paper not detected Paper detected 3 Skew correction sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 2 Original set sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 1 Original B5 sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 1 0 Original LG sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 7 Original stopper HP sensor Original stopper up Original ...

Page 303: ...component on for a long time Main Machine Output Check SP5 804 1 Open SP mode 5 804 2 Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check Refer to the table on the next page 3 Press On then press Off to test the selected item NOTE You cannot exit and close this display until you press off to switch off the output check currently executing Do not keep an electrical component sw...

Page 304: ...otor Finisher 21 Punch Motor Finisher 67 Development Bias 68 Not used 25 LCT Motor 69 Transfer Belt Voltage 26 Bank Motor Paper Tray Unit 70 ID Sensor LED 27 Fusing Feed Out Motor 28 Main Motor 75 Exhaust Fan 29 Duplex Transport Motor 76 Elec Equipment Cooling Fan High Rev 30 Duplex Inverter Motor Rev 77 Elec Equipment Cooling Fan Low Rev 31 Duplex Inverter Motor Fwd 78 Relay Unit Fan 32 Feed Deve...

Page 305: ...or Reverse 6 Feed Clutch 7 Inverter Solenoid 8 Pick up Motor Forward 9 Pick up Motor Reverse 5 1 7 SMC PRINT OUT LISTS SP5 990 1 Open SP mode 5 990 and select the number corresponding to the list that you wish to print SMC System Parameter and Data Lists 1 All Data List 2 SP Mode Data List 3 UP Mode Data List 4 Logging Data List 5 Self Diagnostics Results List 7 NIB Summary 8 NetFile Application L...

Page 306: ...ints from sources other than scanning operation are counted Examples Less than 2 retention copies SMC prints white copies Staples Count Timing Staple engine cycles completed number of staples fired No Counts Staple jams Other Prints by Paper Feeds Count Timing Paper feeds initiated No Counts White duplex copies SMC prints free runs ARDF jams Other Jams that interfered with the total count Trays ar...

Page 307: ... described above Copy Total for Copy Application Count Timing Feed ins started Other Blank white pages output Mode Counts for Copy Application Copies by Magnifications Reduction 25 49 Reduction 50 99 1 1 Enlargement 101 200 Enlargement 201 400 Custom Paper dimensions area etc Count Timing Number of executions for each magnification category Other Also counts white blank copies and the number of ti...

Page 308: ...enter Erase Color Erase All Edit Pen Area Edit Editor Edit Synthesis Nega Posi Center Erase Center Fill Mirror Skew Shadow Effect Screening Gradation Background Gradation Repeat Double Copy Internal External Color Internal External Erase Count Timing Feed ins for each edit mode Other White sheets blank for each mode In the Editor Edit mode the edit and file are counted during fill execution Mode P...

Page 309: ...e position of the pressure springs At this time the nip bandwidth can also be checked with SP1 109 1 Execute SP5 802 to perform a free run of about 50 sheets 2 Open SP1 109 1 press and then press Yes to confirm the selection 3 Press Copy Window to return to the copy window 4 Place an OHP sheet A4 8 5 x 11 sideways on the by pass feed tray 5 Press Start twice The OHP sheet stops in the fusing unit ...

Page 310: ...s the registration setting for the image memory handler by deleting all image files on the HDD 5 MCS Memory Control Service Initializes the automatic delete time setting for stored documents 6 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings 7 Fax application Initializes the fax reset time job login ID all TX RX settings local storage file numbers and off hook timer 8 Printer applica...

Page 311: ...tion Referring to the SMC data lists re enter any values which had been changed from their factory settings Do SP 3 001 2 ID Sensor Initial Setting and SP4 911 1 HDD media check 6 Check the copy quality and the paper path and do any necessary adjustments 5 1 10 SOFTWARE RESET The software can be reboot when the machine hangs up Use the following procedure Turn the main power switch off and on or P...

Page 312: ...e can be reset to their defaults Use the following procedure 1 Press User Tools Counter 2 Hold down and then press System Settings NOTE You must press first 3 When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the system settings press Yes 4 When the message tells you that the settings have been reset press Exit B004S503 WMF ...

Page 313: ...Use the following procedure 1 Press User Tools Counter 2 Hold down and then press Copier Document Server Settings NOTE You must press first 3 When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier Document Server settings press Yes 4 When the message tells you that the settings have been reset press Exit B004S504 WMF ...

Page 314: ...ng has been completed the panel will display OK For operation panel software the Start key lights red while downloading is in progress and then lights green again after downloading is completed CAUTION Never switch off the power while downloading Switching off the power while the new software is being downloading will damage the boot files in the controller 7 After confirming that downloading is c...

Page 315: ... of the NVRAM can be uploaded to and downloaded from a flash memory card 5 3 1 UPLOADING NVRAM DATA SP5 824 1 Turn off the main switch 2 Remove the IC card cover A 3 Plug the flash memory card B into the card slot 4 Turn on the main switch 5 Execute SP5 824 6 Press to start uploading the NVRAM data B004I015 WMF A B ...

Page 316: ...d cover A 3 Plug the flash memory card B into the card slot 4 Turn on the main switch 5 Execute SP5 825 6 Press to start downloading the NVRAM data Note that the following errors could occur during downloading If a card is not installed in the card slot and a message tells you that downloading cannot proceed you cannot execute downloading even by pressing If the correct card for the NVRAM data is ...

Page 317: ...hart shown below and checks the CPU memory HDD and so on An SC code is displayed in the touch panel if the self diagnostic program detects any malfunction or abnormal condition Self Diagnostic Test Flow Power On ASIC Check Initialization Memory Check for Self Diagnostic Test SSCG Check HDD Check Memory Check OPC Check IEEE1284 I F Check CPU Check Program ROM DIMM CRC Check NVRAM Check Illegal Inte...

Page 318: ... power on The following device is required in order to put the machine in the detailed self diagnosis mode No Name G02119350 Parallel Loopback Connector Executing Detailed Self Diagnosis Follow this procedure to execute detailed self diagnosis 1 Switch off the machine and connect the parallel loopback device to the Centronics I F port 2 Hold down press and hold down and then while pressing both ke...

Page 319: ...HAMA_ROM 0 Sat Nov 11 16 15 35 JST 2000 CPU System Bus Clock 100 0 MHz CPU Pipeline Clock 200 0 MHz Board Type 7 ASIC Version 1397306160 RTC Existence existence RAM Capacity 100 663296 MB HDD Existence existence HDD Model TotalCounter 0001000 Program No MAIN ACP82XXXX ENGINE Ver1 96 LCDC V1 39 PI ADF B3515620B SIB B0045383 FIN FIN_SDL BANK A6825150 LCT MBX FCU DPX Error List SCCODE ERROR CODE SC C...

Page 320: ... 10 5 5 8 HOW TO USE UP MODE UP Mode Initial Screen User Tools Counter Display To enter the UP mode press User Tools Counter System Settings In the User Tools Counter display press System Settings Click a tab to display the settings If the Next button is lit in the lower right corner press to display more options Perform the settings press Exit to return to the User Tools Counter display and then ...

Page 321: ...rner press to display more options Perform the settings press Exit to return to the User Tools Counter display and then press Exit to return to the copy window Printer Facsimile Scanner Settings In the User Tools Counter display press Printer Settings Facsimile or Scanner Settings to open the appropriate screen and then click the tab to display more settings The screen below shows the Printer Feat...

Page 322: ...079 B082 5 96 SM Counter In the User Tools Counter display press Counter View the settings press Print Counter Exit to return to the User Tools Counter display and then press Exit to return to the copy window B003SL07 WMF ...

Page 323: ...35 cpm 180 mm s 45 cpm 230 mm s 2 Jam Detection see Note Off On 3 Engine Program Recovery On Off 4 Print Output for Debugging OFF Do not change 5 Factory Duplex Function Check OFF Do not change JPN NA EUR China Taiwan Asia Korea 6 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 7 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 8 Destination OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON NOTE Disabling jam detection is effective only for the main machine not for th...

Page 324: ...IC card for later analysis When an error occurs while the machine is operating a debugging log is generated in memory but this log is lost as soon as processing resumes or after the machine is cycled off and on 5 7 1 CAPTURING DEBUGGING INFORMATION The machine must be setup up correctly with SP codes in order for the debug log to be captured for later retrieval Otherwise the debugging log is lost ...

Page 325: ... Timing for Debug Log Acquisition You can specify that errors related to specific events be recorded in the debug log NOTE More than one event can be selected for retrieval 1 Enter then press SP5858 Debug Save When contains the following features 1 Engine SC Error Saves data when an engine related SC code is generated 2 Controller SC Error Saves debug data when a controller related SC Code is gene...

Page 326: ...Retrieval Specific error information related to a particular module can be selected for retrieval NOTE SP5859 Debug Save Key No allows you to define up to 10 keys More than one key can be set 1 Enter then press 2 Under 5859 press the number of the key that you want to define The example below shows the screen after 1 is pressed to define Key 1 COPY SP 5 859 001 Debug Save Key No Key 1 _ 3 Enter a ...

Page 327: ...ice GPS GW Print Service GSP PM GW Print Service Print Module IMH Image Memory Handler MCS Memory Control Service NCS Network Control Service NFA Net File Application PDL Printer Design Language PTS Print Server RFAX Remote Fax SCS System Control Service SRM System Resource Management WebDB Web Document Box Document Server Note the following restrictions on these settings Only one of the 10 SP cod...

Page 328: ... the Save Debug Log feature is switched on 2 When the error occurs on the operation panel press Reset 3 On the 10 key pad press 01 then press and hold down until the machine beeps then release 4 After completing Steps 1 3 to continue switch the machine off then on Copying the Debug Log to the IC Card 1 Insert the IC card into the copier 2 Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857 007 Copy HDD to IC Car...

Page 329: ... must be sent to the Design Center for analysis Since the amount of data can be fairly large approximately 4 MB compress the data with a standard compression program like ZIP or LZH and send it via email If a PC and the software for converting the IC card data to binary are not available you can send or deliver the IC card Rev 09 2003 ...

Page 330: ......

Page 331: ...DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ...

Page 332: ......

Page 333: ...VERVIEW SM 6 1 B079 B082 6 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 6 1 OVERVIEW 6 1 1 COMPONENT LAYOUT B004V500 WMF 11 10 16 14 12 13 19 18 17 20 21 22 24 23 26 25 27 37 36 39 38 41 40 42 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 43 ...

Page 334: ...Motor 31 Bottom Plate 10 Hot Roller 32 Development Unit 11 Entrance Sensor 33 Charge Roller 12 Inverter Gate 34 Fθ Mirror 13 Inverter Roller 35 Barrel Toroidal Lens BTL 14 Pressure Roller 36 Polygonal Mirror Motor 15 Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade 37 Laser Unit 16 Upper Transport Roller 38 Toner Supply Bottle Holder 17 Transfer Belt 39 Exit Junction Gate 18 OPC Drum 40 Exit Roller 19 Registration Ro...

Page 335: ...s OVERVIEW SM 6 3 B079 B082 6 1 2 PAPER PATH 1 ARDF 2 Interchange unit 3 Duplex unit 4 By pass tray 5 Large Capacity Tray LCT 6 Paper tray unit 7 Two Tray Finisher 8 Bridge unit 9 1 Bin Tray B004V903 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 336: ...ch 2 Registration Clutch 6 Main Motor 3 Upper Paper Feed Clutch 7 Paper Feed Development Motor 4 Lower Paper Feed Clutch In this machine the development unit is provided with its own motor separate from the main motor B004V106 WMF Fusing Transfer Development PCU Drive 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 337: ...s charge of controlling memory and all peripheral devices BICU Base Engine and Image Control Unit This is the engine control board It controls the following functions Engine sequence Timing control for peripherals Image processing video control HDD BICU OPU SBU ARDF Exposure Lamp INVERTER HP Sensor APS Sensors MDB Sensors HVPS Scanner Motor IOB Platen Cover Sensor 1 Bin Tray Finisher Duplex LD LDD...

Page 338: ...IP switches must be set correctly for each See Section 3 Replacement and Adjustment for details SIB Scanner Interface Board Controls the scanner and serves as the signal I F board for the SBU and the OPU The SIB passes signals between the BICU and the scanner unit components and transmits video signals from the SBU to the BICU OPU Operation Panel Unit Controls operation panel and display SBU Senso...

Page 339: ... IEEE1284 Centronics I F Engine I F PCI MB HDD More than 20 GB DC Conv 3V 5V IEEE 1394 USB 2 0 IEEE 802 11b Bluetooth Only One NVRAM RTC 32kB NVRAM 32kB CPU I F 120MHz MEMORY I F 120MHz DC Conv 3V 5V Resident Flash ROM 12MB System NIB Firmware ROM_DIMM Printer Scanner ROM_DIMM PS3 Option Option Options Option BICU FCU Option Option Option B079D901 WMF Rev 09 2003 ...

Page 340: ...ped for use with GW architecture The CPU and memory I F employ a 120 MHz bus 32 bit These components perform CPU and I F control and also control all of the following functions memory local bus interrupts PCI bus video data HDD network operation panel IEEE1284 and image processing SDRAM Comprises a 64 MB RAM chip expandable with a 128 MB SDRAM System Flash ROM Provided with an 12 MB Flash ROM for ...

Page 341: ...otected print Erased Image LS 1 7800 MB Document server local storage archive Remains Storage capacity Max 2 2500 pp Copy 9000 pp Print Fax Scanner Image Area Management 100MB Stores image area information Remains Job Log 20 MB Job log Remains Others 3362 MB Total 20 GB Remains 1 When an application uses an image page first it uses the Image LS area If this area is in use and not available then it...

Page 342: ...yer has a high electrical resistance in the dark Laser exposure Processed data from the scanned original is retrieved from the memory and transferred to the drum by two laser beams C which form an electrostatic latent image on the drum surface The amount of charge remaining as a latent image on the drum depends on the laser beam intensity controlled by the BICU Development The magnetic developer b...

Page 343: ... Separation Paper separates from the drum as a result of the electrical attraction between the paper and the transfer belt Pick off pawls F help separate the paper from the drum ID sensor The ID sensor G measures the reflectivity of the pattern formed by the laser on the surface of the drum This output signal is used for toner supply control and also measures the drum surface reflectivity which is...

Page 344: ...rd mirrors and through the lens on the lens block The 1st scanner consists of the exposure lamp a reflector and the 1st mirror The exposure lamp is energized by a dc supply to avoid uneven light intensity while the 1st scanner moves in the sub scan direction down the page The entire exposure lamp surface is frosted to ensure even exposure in the main scan direction across the page The light reflec...

Page 345: ...e in the sub scan direction is done by changing the scanner drive motor speed and in the main scan direction it is done by image processing on the BICU board NOTE Magnification in the sub scan direction can be adjusted by changing the scanner drive motor speed using SP4 008 ADF mode The scanners are always kept at their home position the scanner home position sensor E detects the 1st scanner to sc...

Page 346: ... is on these sensors are active and the original size data is always sent to the CPU However the CPU checks the data only when the platen cover sensor C is activated after the platen reaches about 15 cm above the exposure glass as it is closed The main CPU detects the original size by the on off signals received from the APS sensors NOTE If the copy is made with the platen fully open the main CPU ...

Page 347: ...0 7 0 NOTE L Lengthwise S Sideways O Paper present X Low For other combinations CANNOT DETECT ORIG SIZE will be indicated on the operation panel display The above table shows the outputs of the sensors for each original size This original size detection method eliminates the necessity for a pre scan and increases the machine s productivity However if the by pass tray is used note that the machine ...

Page 348: ... and command control The IPU on the BICU processes auto shading filtering magnification γ correction and gradation The memory controller performs image compression decompression and memory address control for binary picture processing mode only LD Unit Performs dual channel multi beam exposure multiple exposure and synchronous detection Controller Controls image archiving controls printing and sec...

Page 349: ...the black level for even pixels to match the odd pixels Signal composition Analog signals for odd and even pixels from the CCD are merged by a switching device Signal amplification The analog signal is amplified by amplifiers in the AGC circuit The maximum gains of the amplifiers are controlled by the CPU on the BICU board After the above processing the analog signals are converted to 8 bit signal...

Page 350: ...etermines the reference value for A D conversion for the scan line Then the IPU sends the reference value to the A D controller on the SBU When an original with a gray background is scanned the density of the gray area is the peak white level density Therefore the original background will not appear on copies Because peak level data is taken for each scan line ADS corrects for any changes in backg...

Page 351: ...rd which carries out the following processes on the image data 1 Auto shading 2 Filtering MTF and smoothing 3 Magnification 4 γ correction 5 Grayscale processing 6 Binary picture processing 7 Error diffusion 8 Dithering 9 Video path control 10 Test pattern generation The image data then goes to the HDD HDD LD1 LD2 Controller SBU SIB LDDR Mother Board GAVD FCI IPU BICU B079D905 WMF ...

Page 352: ...andard settings To display this screen press User Tools Counter Copier Document Server Settings General Features Copy Quality Mode Function Text Best reproduction of text and sharp lines Ignores background texture pg 6 23 Text Photo Good reproduction of mixed text and photographs with accurate grayscaling better than that achieved in the Text mode pg 6 24 Photo Best possible reproduction of photog...

Page 353: ...ection Pre Filter Background Erase Pre Filter Smoothing Main Scan Magnification Text Photo Photo Primary Compression Decompression Controller Independent Dot Erase HDD Filtering Text Pale Generation Secondary Compression Decompression γ Coefficient Sent to HDD Video Control Scanner Printer Application Grayscale Processing FCU FAX Application LD Unit ...

Page 354: ...ing adjusting multiple adjacent pixels in the direction of main scanning Adjustment of magnification in the sub scan direction is done by changing the scanning speed Independent dot erase Attempts to recognize and eliminate scattered independent dots in copies Processes only pixels of high density and eliminates those of low density Filtering MTF filter smoothing Performs mainly edge enhancement w...

Page 355: ... MTF filter stronger than that of the Normal setting thus increasing the sharpness of lines Image Processing Flow Related SP Modes Scanner Image Correction Shading Correction Pre Filter Processing Background Erase SP4903 65 Background Erase Level Text Mode Pre Filter Smoothing SP4903 10 Pre Filter Text Magnification Main Scan Direction SP2909 1 Main Scan Magnification Independent Dot Erase SP4903 ...

Page 356: ...ses an MTF filter stronger than that of the Normal setting thus increasing the sharpness of lines Image Processing Flow Related SP Modes Scanner Image Correction Shading Correction Pre Filter Processing Background Erase SP4903 67 Background Erase Level Text Photo Mode Pre Filter Smoothing SP4903 13 Pre Filter Text Photo Magnification Main Scan Direction SP2909 1 Main Scan Magnification Independent...

Page 357: ...ion For photo mode the features used depend on which type of greyscale processing has been selected for Photo mode either dithering and smoothing or error diffusion and MTF this depends on the setting of SP 4904 001 Details are explained later in this section Image Processing Flow Related SP Modes Scanner Image Correction Shading Correction Pre Filter Processing Background Erase SP4903 66 Backgrou...

Page 358: ...sharpness of lines Image Processing Flow Related SP Modes Scanner Image Correction Shading Correction Pre Filter Processing Background Erase SP4903 68 Background Erase Level Light Original Pre Filter Smoothing SP4903 15 Pre Filter Light Magnification Main Scan Direction SP2909 1 Main Scan Magnification Independent Dot Erase SP4903 63 Independent Dot Erase Light Original Filter Processing MTF Corre...

Page 359: ...r better image quality Image Processing Flow Related SP Modes Scanner Image Correction Shading Correction Pre Filter Processing Background Erase SP44903 69 Background Erase Level Generation Copy Pre Filter Smoothing SP4903 16 Pre Filter Generation Copy Magnification Main Scan Direction SP2909 1 Main Scan Magnification Independent Dot Erase SP4903 64 Independent Dot Erase Generation Copy Generation...

Page 360: ...press and hold down on the 10 key pad then Copy SP on the touch screen These SP mode settings are provided to reduce the incidence of moiré in the reproduction of images whose data signals have been compressed in the direction of the main scan However these SP adjustments can cause different effects in the reproduction of images depending on Whether they contain areas shaded with dot screening new...

Page 361: ... 20 then the scanning data up to 20 is set to 0 and cut from the image The range for this SP code adjustment is 0 255 The recommended range for a normal document is 0 60 An official document on rough texture paper would fall in the recommended range of 120 160 The correct setting for any original will vary with the texture and quality of the background but remember that selecting a higher numbers ...

Page 362: ...feature can be adjusted for each mode The filter compares each pixel with the pixels around an area 7 pixels x 7 lines If the sum of the pixels at the edges is smaller than the threshold value the object pixel is changed to zero white depending on the strength of the SP mode setting Setting a larger setting increases the number of dots erased but if set too high this SP can also remove small or fi...

Page 363: ...scan lines parallel to the direction of feed A SP4903 77 LWC Threshold Sub Scan Generation Mode Targets sub scan lines at right angles to the direction of feed B For sharp thin lines set SP4903 75 for a higher LWC setting and for softer lines set a lower setting For thick lines select 3 To thin or thicken lines in the main scan direction select an SP4903 75 setting larger or smaller than the setti...

Page 364: ...oefficient adjustment adjust the Strength setting first to achieve the approximate effect that you want then do the Level adjustment Text Mode Adjust the image for the Text mode with the four master settings within their allowed ranges for ranges see Section 5 Service Tables To fine adjust a master setting set it to 0 then perform the adjustments listed below SP4904 020 0 Text General Quality 25 6...

Page 365: ...stment Use the master SP codes gross adjustment of the image processing mode after you have set SP4904 001 1 for error diffusion If you need to fine adjust a master setting set the master setting to 0 to access its slave SP codes Adjust the image for the Photo mode with the one master setting within its allowed range for the range see Section 5 Service Tables To fine adjust the master setting set ...

Page 366: ...efficient 155 256 SP4903 048 Text Photo All Coefficient 155 256 SP4903 085 Filter Strength Text Photo Edge 155 256 SP4903 086 Filter Adj Text Photo Edge Det 155 256 SP4903 087 Filter Adj Text Photo Mag 155 256 SP4904 010 Gray Adj Text Photo Edge Det 155 256 SP4904 028 0 Text Photo General Quality 257 400 SP4903 051 Text Photo Edge Coefficient 257 400 SP4903 052 Text Photo All Coefficient 257 400 S...

Page 367: ...SP4904 029 0 Pale General Quality SP4903 055 Filter Level Light Original SP4903 056 Filter Strength Light Original Generation Copy Mode Adjust the image for the Generation Copy mode with the one master setting within its allowed range for range see Section 5 Service Tables To fine adjust the master setting set it to 0 then perform the adjustments listed below SP4904 030 0 Generation General Qualit...

Page 368: ...rast text but can also cause moiré to appear in photos on the same original Conversely weakening the MTF filter softens the edges of text characters and reduces the occurrence of moiré but low contrast characters may fade Strengthen or weaken the MTF filter for the Text mode only when necessary Adjustment of the MTF filter coefficient performs very fine level adjustment of the applied strength of ...

Page 369: ...xt and lines Selecting a larger value sharpens the clarity However increasing the value also increases the possibility of producing moiré in the image Filter Setting All Column 3 Provides filter processing for the overall image not to improve just text lines or photographs but to improve the image as a whole This filter coefficient reduces the incidence of moiré in images that contain shaded areas...

Page 370: ...P mode settings listed in the table below are used to adjust MTF filter coefficient and strength for the Pale mode and Generation Copy modes Mode Coefficient Strength Pale Mode SP4903 55 SP4903 56 Generation Copy SP4903 57 SP4903 58 Ranges 0 6 0 7 Strengthening the MTF filter sharpens the edges of text characters and improves the appearance of low contrast text but can also cause moiré to appear i...

Page 371: ...this case the filter processing means smoothing only The filter coefficient for smoothing can be adjusted with SP4904 37 Smoothing Filter in Photo Mode If 1 is selected then the image grayscales are processed with error diffusion processing just as they are processed with the Normal and Glossy Photo settings on the operation panel The MTF filter applied is the same as that applied for the Normal s...

Page 372: ...ng Dither Pattern Picture Quality Text Quality Processing Priority 0 8 x 8 75 lines High Low Dot screen areas 1 8 x 8 106 lines Highest Low Filled areas highest priority Default 2 6 x 6 142 lines Medium Medium Filled areas 3 4 x 4 212 lines Low High Resolution For these dither adjustments to take effect SP4904 1 Grayscale Photo Mode must be set to 0 to enable dithering Here are some general rules ...

Page 373: ...rty optics SP Mode Default Range SP4904 5 Special Text Density 0 0 7 Normally the default setting 0 leaves this feature switched off Select a higher setting to increase the effect or a lower setting to decrease the effect High density vertical black lines may require a higher setting but a higher setting could cause the overall density of the copy to lower or could cause low density areas to drop ...

Page 374: ...l in originals copied in the Generation Copy mode To improve the appearance of graduated fill areas of high density set to 1 so the process can ignore black and more accurately reproduce areas with graduated fill For example the 1 setting is ideal for copying Generation Copy originals of medical charts that contain images of internal organs SP4904 4 Density Setting for Copied Original Mode Setting...

Page 375: ...s The copier scans the auto image density detection area a narrow strip at one end of the main scan line As the scanner scans down the page the IPU on the BICU detects the peak white level for each scan line in this narrow strip only The IPU uses this peak white level as a reference value for analog to digital conversion of the scan line then the IPU sends the reference value to the A D controller...

Page 376: ...e Text Photo mode User Tools De emphasize fine lines in jagged valleys and reduce the occurrence of moiré Select Soft for Text mode User Tools Weaken the MTF filters for Text mode SP4903 24 Main Scan 9 SP4903 25 Sub Scan 13 SP4903 26 Main Scan 2 SP4903 27 Sub Scan 2 Reduce the occurrence of moiré when reducing the size of the original for copying Select Soft for Text mode User Tools Weaken the MTF...

Page 377: ... 9 15 14 12 10 9 14 11 SP4903 25 Sub Filter Level 13 11 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 SP4903 26 Main Filter Strength 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 SP4903 26 Sub Filter Strength 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 Text Mode 155 256 MTF Strength Strong Default Weak Default Settings Sharp Normal Soft SP4903 28 Main Filter Level 11 10 9 9 14 12 10 9 9 SP4903 29 Sub Filter Level 13 13 13 10 13 13 13 13 10 SP4903 30 Main Filter Strength 3 3 ...

Page 378: ...4903 55 Filter Level Light Original 5 4 3 2 6 4 3 2 6 SP4903 56 Filter Strength Light Original 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 2 Generation Copy Mode MTF Strength Strong Default Weak Default Settings Sharp Normal Soft SP4903 55 Filter Level Light Original 2 6 5 4 3 2 6 5 4 SP4903 56 Filter Strength Light Original 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 ...

Page 379: ...py image these are 256 gradations for the laser power The output path from the laser diode to the drum is shown above The LD unit outputs two laser beams to the polygon mirror through the cylindrical lens and the shield glass Each surface of the polygon mirror reflects two full main scan lines The laser beams go to the F theta mirror mirror and BTL barrel toroidal lens Then these laser beams go to...

Page 380: ...mperature increases In order to keep the output level constant the LDDR monitors the electrical current passing through the photodiode PD Then it increases or decreases the current to the laser diode as necessary comparing it with the reference level This auto power control is done just after the machine is turned on and during printing while the laser diode is active The reference levels are adju...

Page 381: ...oise generated by the polygon motor and reduces the frequency of the image data clock The two laser beams follow the path collimating lenses C prism D polygonal mirror E The two laser beams arrive on the drum surface about 2 mm apart in the main scan direction and about 0 06 mm apart at 400 dpi in the sub scan direction see the next page The two mm difference in the main scan direction allows the ...

Page 382: ...ion of L2 L1 does not move Both LD unit positions are at fixed distances from the LD unit home position sensor D Usually the LD unit moves directly to the proper position However when the number of times that the resolution has changed reaches the value of SP2 109 5 LD Beam Pitch Adjustment the LD unit moves to the home position and this re calibrates the LD unit positioning mechanism B004D543 WMF...

Page 383: ... during servicing power to the laser diode is switched off when the front cover or upper right cover is opened Four safety switches are installed in series on the LD5 V line from the power supply unit PSU via the BICU board CN403 1 CN403 3 CN402 4 CN312 1 CN109 8 CN301 10 5V PSU BICU LDDR 5V LD5V LD1 LD2 Front Cover Safety Switch Upper Right Cover Switch B004D505 WMF ...

Page 384: ...W 1 Toner Collection Coil 2 Toner Collection Plate 3 Image Density Sensor 4 Pick off Pawl 5 OPC Drum φ60 mm 6 Transfer Entrance Guide 7 Charge Roller 8 Charge Roller Cleaning Roller 9 Drum Cleaning Blade 2 10 Quenching Lamp 11 Drum Cleaning Blade 1 B079D301 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ...

Page 385: ...nge The flywheel E on the end of the drum drive shaft stabilizes the rotation speed this prevents banding and jitter on copies 6 7 3 DRUM PAWLS The pick off pawls A mounted in the holders B on the drum and in contact with the drum strip paper from the drum if it has not yet separated The gears C are removable and the positions of the holders can be adjusted 6 7 4 DRUM TONER SEALS Seals have been a...

Page 386: ...ng The new cleaning blade is held in contact with the drum by two small springs B one on each end This cleaning blade is not a counter blade Every time the PCU is opened for replacement or cleaning the spring closest to the front of the PCU must moved in order to retract the cleaning blade away from the OPC drum After cleaning or replacement the spring must be returned to its original position to ...

Page 387: ...rum The drum charge roller A contacts the surface of the drum B to give it a negative charge The high voltage supply board C supplies a negative dc voltage to the drum charge roller through the charge roller terminal D bias plate E and the rear roller bushing F to give the drum surface a negative charge of 950V B004D525 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 388: ...nsor pattern for toner density control After creating ID sensor pattern A another pattern B is made To do this the LD switches off the charge roller voltage drops and the drum potential is reduced to 600V At the same time development bias returns to 550V The drum potential is now slightly higher than the development bias so only a very small amount of toner transfers to the drum The ID sensor meas...

Page 389: ...297 mm Default 1450 V SP2309 1 Paper Lower Width a Width limit Default 150 mm SP2309 2 Paper Upper Width b Width limit Default 216 mm SP2914 1 Cα Adjust 10V step Default 150 V SP2914 2 Cβ Adjust 10V step Default 0 V The way that these SP modes are used is shown below For example with the default settings if the paper width fed from the by pass tray is 200 mm the charge roller voltage will be 1450 ...

Page 390: ...5 DRUM CHARGE ROLLER CLEANING The drum charge roller A always in contact with the drum gets dirty easily so the cleaning pad B also remains in contact with the charge roller to clean it The pin C in contact with the cam gear D enables the gear to move the cleaning pad from side to side and improve cleaning New Vref Decision 1 10 9 8 3 2 Vref Decision 1 3 2 12 15 14 13 Series of copies ID sensor pa...

Page 391: ...d Descriptions DEVELOPMENT SM 6 59 B079 B082 6 9 DEVELOPMENT 6 9 1 OVERVIEW 1 Drum 5 Mixing Auger 2 Development Roller 6 Development Filter 3 Paddle Roller 7 Doctor Blade 4 TD Sensor B004D401 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 392: ...oller consists of the outer paddle A and the inner auger B The outer paddle moves developer to the front and supplies it to the development roller Developer that spills off by the doctor blade passes through the holes C in the outer paddle and is transported to the rear by the inner auger While the dual mixing roller is moving the developer some developer also passes back to the development unit t...

Page 393: ... paper OHP sheets etc can also be loaded in the by pass tray but adjustments must be performed with the SP modes listed below in order to avoid jams and misfeeds SP Mode SP Name SP2 201 1 Development Bias Width 216 297 mm Default 510 V SP2 309 1 Paper Lower Width a Width limit Default 150 mm SP2 309 2 Paper Upper Width b Width limit Default 216 mm SP2 914 3 Process Control Setting Bγ Adjust 10V st...

Page 394: ... kept in place by the chuck G The toner bottle holder lever E cannot be lowered when a toner bottle is not installed in the holder This prevents toner falling out of the holder unit as a result of lowering the handle with no toner bottle installed The toner bottle has a spiral groove H which rotates the bottle to move toner to the development unit When the bottle holder unit is pulled out the chuc...

Page 395: ...otor A rotates the toner bottle B and the mylar blades C Toner falls into the toner bottle holder and the toner supply mylar blades transfer the toner to slit D Installing the PCU opens the shutter E The toner falls into the development unit through the slit B004D545 WMF B004D509 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 396: ...is installed namely 20 g of toner per 500 g of developer 4 0 by weight the TD sensor must be set to its initial setting of 4 0V with SP2 801 This initial setting is used as the toner supply reference voltage or Vref For every copy cycle the TD sensor directly checks the toner density in the developer mixture and after 10 copies these 10 readings are averaged and this value becomes TD sensor output...

Page 397: ...d condition and the machine switches on the toner supply motor If a difference greater than 0 45 is detected then toner concentration is judged as low but the machine does another test by comparing Vref and Vt 10 If the machine determines that Vt 10 is greater than Vref 40 times the toner supply motor switches on and remains on for twice the time that Vt 10 was greater than Vref If the toner conce...

Page 398: ...tion has not reached the standard level the toner supply motor rotates continuously until it does maximum motor on time is 16 seconds and then it will switch off 6 9 8 TONER SUPPLY WITH ABNORMAL SENSORS The TD sensor is checked every copy If the readings from the TD sensor become abnormal during a copy job the machine holds the GAIN factor constant GAIN is normally calculated from TD sensor readin...

Page 399: ...r E which moves the cleaning blade side to side This side to side movement disperses accumulated toner to prevent early blade edge wear at one location The drum reverses about 5 mm after every copy job to remove particles on the edge of the cleaning blade 6 10 2 TONER RECYCLING Toner collected by the toner collection coil A is transported to the opening B This toner falls into the development unit...

Page 400: ...relay roller 13 Lower paper size dial 6 Upper separation roller 14 Lower paper size switch 7 Lower relay sensor 15 Upper paper size dial 8 Lower relay roller 16 Upper paper size switch Each paper tray which employs the FRR system can hold 500 sheets Two relay sensors positioned above each set of relay rollers detect paper jams A selection dial allows you to select the setting for the size of the p...

Page 401: ...e paper The paper feed clutch stays on until shortly after the registration sensor C actuates 6 11 3 PICK UP AND SEPARATION ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM When the paper tray A is not inside the machine the separation roller B is away from the paper feed roller C and the pick up roller D stays in the upper position When the paper tray is set into the machine it pushes the release lever E This causes the...

Page 402: ...aches the proper height for paper feed the paper pushes up the pick up roller and the actuator J on the pick up roller supporter activates the paper height sensor K to stop the tray lift motor After several paper feed cycles the paper level gradually lowers and the paper height sensor is de activated The tray lift motor turns on again until this sensor is activated again When the paper tray is rem...

Page 403: ...e is paper in the paper tray the paper end feeler A is raised by the paper stack and the paper end sensor B is deactivates When the paper tray runs out of paper the paper end feeler drops into the cutout C in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated B004D706 WMF A B C ...

Page 404: ...me for the paper to press against the registration rollers and buckle slightly to correct any skew The registration sensor also detects misfeeds Next the registration clutch F actuates and the relay clutch at the correct time to align the paper with the image on the drum The registration rollers then feed the paper to the image transfer section Two new dust blades have been added around the regist...

Page 405: ...ed the printer control board recognizes that the paper tray is not installed When the paper size actuator is at the mark the paper tray can be set up to accommodate one of a wider range of paper sizes by using one of the user tools on the machine s operation panel Models Paper Size Switch North America Europe Asia 1 2 3 4 81 2 x 13 Portrait A3 Portrait ON ON OFF ON A4 Landscape A4 Landscape ON ON ...

Page 406: ...BY PASS TRAY B079 B082 6 74 SM 6 12 BY PASS TRAY 6 12 1 OVERVIEW 1 Paper feed roller 2 Paper end sensor 3 Pick up Roller 4 By pass Tray 5 Separation roller B004V510 WMF 1 1 2 3 4 5 ...

Page 407: ...n by the copier through gear A When the print key is pressed the pick up solenoid B turns on and the pick up roller C moves onto the paper When the by pass tray runs out of paper the paper end feeler D drops into the cutout in the by pass tray and the paper end sensor E is activated B004D500 WMF B004D501 WMF A C B D E ...

Page 408: ... is connected to the terminal plate The pattern for each paper width is unique Therefore the copier determines which paper has been placed in the by pass tray by the signal output from the board However the copier does not determine the paper length from the by pass tray hardware B004D522 WMF A3 B4 A4L B5L A5L B6L 51 2 81 2 11 B004D523 WMF A ...

Page 409: ...criptions DUPLEX UNIT SM 6 77 B079 B082 6 13 DUPLEX UNIT 6 13 1 OVERVIEW 1 Entrance sensor 4 Upper transport roller 2 Inverter gate 5 Lower transport roller 3 Inverter roller 6 Exit sensor B004D101 WMF 6 1 2 3 4 5 ...

Page 410: ...DUPLEX UNIT B079 B082 6 78 SM 6 13 2 DUPLEX DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Inverter roller 4 Transport motor 2 Inverter motor 5 Lower transport roller 3 Upper transport roller B004D103 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 ...

Page 411: ...ows the order of pages The number B in the illustration shows the order of sheets of copy paper if shaded this indicates the second side Up to A4 lengthwise LT lengthwise The duplex unit can store two sheets of copy paper Example 8 pages The number A in the illustration shows the order of pages The number B in the illustration shows the order of sheets of copy paper if shaded this indicates the se...

Page 412: ...es longer than A4 LT in the reverse feed path which has been lengthened in the design of this machine Inversion and Exit The inverter gate solenoid turns on and the inverter motor turns on in reverse shortly after the trailing edge of the paper passes through the entrance sensor D As a result the inverter gate E is opened and the inverter roller rotates counterclockwise The paper is sent to the co...

Page 413: ...B082 6 14 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION 6 14 1 OVERVIEW 1 Transfer belt 6 OPC 2 Drive roller 7 Pick off pawls 3 Transfer belt cleaning blade 8 ID sensor 4 Transfer roller 9 Contact lever 5 Idle roller 10 Transfer belt contact clutch B004D561 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 6 9 10 ...

Page 414: ...belt and drum must not remain in contact for too long to prevent contamination of the drum with oil or other foreign material from the transfer belt 6 14 3 TRANSFER BELT UNIT CONTACT MECHANISM The belt contact and release mechanism consists of the belt contact clutch A cam B and contact lever C The belt contact clutch turns on and the cam attached to the clutch rotates half a complete rotation The...

Page 415: ...or switches on the transfer belt contact clutch switches on and the transfer belt touches the drum When the paper enters the gap between the belt and the drum the high voltage supply board D applies a high positive current to the belt to transfer the image to the paper After receiving the image from the drum the paper is fed by the belt The paper moves to the end of the transfer belt unit where it...

Page 416: ...C terminal plate D and the bias roller E The high voltage supply board adjusts the current to the roller to keep a small but constant current flow to ground through the belt paper and drum If this current is not kept constant efficiency of toner transfer and paper separation will vary with paper thickness type environmental condition or changes in transfer belt surface resistance B004D564 WMF A B ...

Page 417: ...rent to flow directly from the transfer belt to the drum and not through the paper which could cause an insufficient amount of toner to transfer to narrow width paper Thick paper must be fed from the by pass tray because SP modes are available only for the by pass tray in order to accommodate thick paper By default the current for paper narrower than 216 mm is 1 5 times the normal current This ill...

Page 418: ...er from leading edge current to image area current and for switching off at the trailing edge can also be changed The table below lists the SP modes you can use to adjust these settings SP2 301 Transfer Current Adjustment Image areas SP2 301 1 1st Side of Paper SP2 301 2 2nd Side of Paper SP2 301 4 By pass Feed Leading edge areas SP2 301 3 Leading Edge SP2 301 5 Leading Edge By pass Feed SP2 911 T...

Page 419: ...pes off toner and paper dust remaining on the transfer belt Scraped off toner and paper dust falls into the toner collection tank B in the transfer belt unit This toner is not recycled When the toner overflow sensor C detects toner overflow the toner overflow indicator lights Up to 999 copies can be made before the toner overflow condition shuts down the machine B004D524 WMF A B C ...

Page 420: ... SCATTER PREVENTION To reduce the incidence of toner scattering the sponge strip has been replaced with a velvet strip A that extends across the length of the transfer belt unit At each end of the strip B and C new seals have been added B079D723 WMF A B C Rev 09 2003 ...

Page 421: ...ollers 1 2 11 Entrance guide 3 Junction gate 12 Fusing lamp center 4 Idle roller duplex unit 13 Fusing lamp ends 5 Fusing unit exit sensor 14 Thermistors central end 6 Spring 15 Thermostat central end 7 Fusing exit guide plate 16 Hot roller 8 Pressure roller 17 Hot roller strippers 9 Pressure arm 18 Exit roller B004D601 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 ...

Page 422: ...r and a timing belt D 6 15 3 FUSING DRIVE RELEASE MECHANISM The fusing unit drive release mechanism automatically disengages the fusing unit drive gear A when the right door B is opened When the right cover is opened the actuator plate C pulls release wire D The wire pulls the fusing drive gear bracket E and the fusing unit drive is disengaged B004D603 WMF B004D605 WMF A B C D A B C D E ...

Page 423: ...nd pressure rollers and prevents thin paper from buckling against the hot roller which can cause blurring at the leading edge of the copy 6 15 5 EXIT GUIDE PLATE AND DE CURLER ROLLERS The exit guide plate A also functions as pressure roller stripper The exit guide plate can be moved in order to remove jammed paper Stacking has been improved by mounting a face curl correction mechanism at the paper...

Page 424: ...pressure between the hot roller B and the pressure roller C The applied pressure can be changed by adjusting the position of the pressure springs The left position D is the normal setting and the right position E increases the pressure to prevent insufficient fusing by the fusing unit B004D663 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 425: ...ller is metal it can collect adhering matter better than the pressure roller which is coated with Teflon Some new design features have been implemented in order to cope with the lower temperatures required for the new toner which has a melting temperature much lower than the previous toner The cleaning roller A is composed of an aluminum shell with an internal heat pipe suspended in the middle of ...

Page 426: ... to turn freely to allow more time for cleaning before printing However make sure that the customer understands that increasing this SP setting slows down the first print time These are the SP codes that control hot roller stripper cleaning For details refer to Section 5 Service Tables No Name Function SP3905 1 Number of Rotations Prescribes the number of times the hot roller is rotated at the end...

Page 427: ...r reaches the registration roller but in this case the fusing exit motor remains on If a request to enter the Off mode is received while hot roller stripper cleaning is in progress the machine enters the Off mode and the cleaning cycle stops immediately If the machine switches to any of the energy saver modes low power mode etc the cleaning cycle completes and does not halt The cleaning cycle is n...

Page 428: ...s the center of the fusing roller and the second fusing lamp ends 550W B heats both ends of the hot roller This arrangement ensures even heat on all surfaces of the roller In order to control the temperature of the roller two high response thermistors are attached to the unit one near the center C and one at the end D of the hot roller B079D913 WMF A B C D ...

Page 429: ...ure the machine can operate The reload temperature is 3 C below the fusing temperature this depends on the settings of SP1105 1 4 7 8 As soon as the thermistors detect the fusing temperature the CPU switches the lamps off but frequently switches on off again in order to maintain the fusing temperature The default temperatures of SP1105 for these models are set 10 30 degrees lower than the temperat...

Page 430: ... is enabled it is done when the temperature reaches the print ready re load temperature The re load temperature can be adjusted with SP1105 5 6 In the opposite case even if fusing idling is disabled it is done when the temperature at power up 15 C The fusing idling time is as follows Fusing Idling Mode Temperature at power on 0 Disabled 1 Enabled SP1103 1 15 C or less 30 s 30 s Higher than 15 C No...

Page 431: ...down from 45 cpm to 35 cpm NOTE The previous machine automatically reduced line speed 30 ppm down for thick paper In these models however the speed is reduced from 45 cpm to 35 cpm for the 45 cpm machine This adjustment is performed automatically for the B082 45 cpm machine only Note these other important points regarding cpm down for thick paper on the 45 cpm machine When the line speed switches ...

Page 432: ...e of the fusing unit exceeds 150 C and switch off when the main motor switches off If the hot roller temperature exceeds 230 C for 5 seconds or more the CPU cuts off the power to the fusing lamp and SC543 Fusing Overheat Error will be displayed Even if the thermistor overheat protection fails there is a thermostat in series with the common ground line of the fusing lamp If the temperature of the t...

Page 433: ...SP modes Energy timer UP mode Auto off timer UP mode Auto off disabling SP mode Stand by Mode Energy Saver Mode Low Power Mode Auto Off Mode Off Stand by Mode Off Mode FAX RX etc Printer Data in After Printing Energy Saver Key Off Return Time Less than 3 s Energy Saver Key On or Energy Saver Timer 10 s to 4 hrs Default 60 s Operation Sw Off or Auto Off Timer Energy Saver Timer Operation Sw Off or ...

Page 434: ...ver LED and the Power LED If the CPU receives the image print out command from an application e g to print incoming fax data or to print data from a PC the fusing temperature rises to print the data Return to stand by mode If one of the following is done the machine returns to stand by mode The Clear Mode Energy Saver Mode key is pressed Any key on the operation panel or touch panel screen is pres...

Page 435: ...he handset is off hook An original is in the ARDF The ARDF is open Off Stand by mode The system 5V is still supplied to all components When the machine detects a ringing signal or receives a stream of data for a print job the 24V supply is activated and the machine automatically prints the incoming message or executes the print job Off Mode The system 5V supply also turns off However 5VE 5V for en...

Page 436: ......

Page 437: ...SPECIFICATIONS ...

Page 438: ......

Page 439: ...A4 81 2 x 11 LEF 1 to 1 ARDF 45 cpm A4 81 2 x 11 LEF 1 to 1 ARDF B079 4 5 s 1st Tray A4 81 2 x 11 LEF First Copy Time B082 3 6 s 1st Tray A4 81 2 x 11 LEF B079 Less than 18 s Warm up Time B082 Less than 20 s Continuous Copy 1 999 operation panel entry Paper Capacity 1 050 sheets 500 sheets tray x 2 with 50 sheets in by pass tray A4 81 2 x 11 and smaller 500 sheets Paper Output B4 and larger 250 sh...

Page 440: ... kW Warm up Less than 1 3 kW Less than 1 3 kW Stand by Less than 170 W Less than 195 W Auto Off Mode Ave 8 W h NA Ave 9 W h EU Asia Ave 8 W h Ave 9 W h EU Asia Maximum Less than 1 44 kW NA Less than 1 5 kW EU Asia Less than 1 44 kW NA Less than 1 5 kW EU Asia Noise Emission Mode Model Mainframe Only Full System Copying B079 B082 69 dB A or less 70 dB A or less 73 dB A or less 74 dB A or less Stand...

Page 441: ...t 2 ARDF 9 Two tray finisher 2 shift trays 3 One bin tray 10 Booklet Finisher 4 Duplex unit 11 1000 Sheet Finisher 1 shift tray 5 By pass tray 12 Bridge Unit 6 LCT Large Capacity Tray 13 Cabinet 7 Copier NOTE The Bridge Unit is required for the optional finishers B004V502 WMF 8 1 3 4 10 2 5 11 9 7 6 12 13 ...

Page 442: ...See Note 3 C B377 31 4 hole Northern Europe Key Counter Bracket C A674 User Account Enhance Unit C B443 Copier CSS Kit A886 C A886 Fax Option U B547 G3 Interface Unit U B591 Function Upgrade Board C A892 SAF Memory C G578 Fax Handset USA model only C A646 Printer Scanner Unit U B548 PostScript3 Unit U G354 17 Network Interface Board C B525 03 1394 Interface Unit C G336 USB 2 0 Interface Board C B5...

Page 443: ...iginal Reproduction Range 30 200 Sub scan direction only Power Source DC 24V 5V from the copier Power Consumption Less than 60 W Dimensions W D H 570 mm x 518 mm x 150 mm 22 4 x 20 4 x 5 9 Weight 12 kg PAPER TRAY UNIT B542 Paper Size A5 SEF to A3 SEF 51 2 x 81 2 SEF to 11 x 17 SEF Paper Weight 64 g m2 105 g m2 20 lb 28 lb Tray Capacity 500 sheets 80 g m2 20 lb Paper Feed System FRR Paper Height De...

Page 444: ... On A3 B4 A4 B5 11 x 17 to 81 2 x 11 Staple Mode Off 60 to 157 g m2 16 43 lb Paper Weight Staple Mode On 64 to 90 g m2 17 24 lb Stapler Capacity 30 sheets A3 B4 11 x 17 81 2 x 14 50 sheets A4 B5 LEF 81 2 x 11 Paper Capacity Staple Mode Off 1 000 sheets A4 81 2 x 11 or smaller 80 g m2 20 lb 500 sheets A3 B4 11 x 17 81 2 x 14 80 g m2 20 lb Staple Mode On 80 g m2 20 lb Number of Sets Set Size 10 to 5...

Page 445: ... m2 20 lb Lower Tray Multi tray Staple Mode 1500 sheets A4S LTS 80 g m2 20 lb 750 sheets A3 B5 DLT LTL 80 g m2 20 lb 500 sheets A5S 80 g m2 20 lb 100 sheets A5L HLT 80 g m2 20 lb Lower Tray Normal Mode 2000 sheets A4S LTS 80 g m2 20 lb 750 sheets A3 B5 DLT LTL 80 g m2 20 lb 500 sheets A5S 80 g m2 20 lb 100 sheets A5L HLT 80 g m2 20 lb Stapler Tray Capacity No Mixed Original Mode 50 sheets A4 B5 LT...

Page 446: ... 52 g m2 to 163 g m2 14 to 42 lb Staple mode 64 g m2 to 80 g m2 17 to 21 lb Paper Weight Saddle stitch mode 64 g m2 to 80 g m2 17 to 21 lb 64 g m2 to 128 g m2 17 to 34 lb Cover sheet only Tray Modes Paper size Capacity A4 LEF LT LEF or shorter 150 sheets Proof tray A4 SEF LT SEF or longer 75 sheets A4 LEF LT LEF or shorter 1000 sheets No staple A4 SEF LT SEF or longer 500 sheet A4 LEF LT LEF or sh...

Page 447: ...Source 24 Vdc from copier Power Consumption Less than 170 W Dimensions w x d x h 689 x 603 x 1055 mm 27 1 x 23 7 x 41 5 in Weight 49 kg 107 8 lb 1 80 g m2 20 lb BRIDGE UNIT B538 Paper Size Standard sizes A6 lengthwise to A3 HLT to DLT Non standard sizes Width 100 to 305 mm Length 148 to 432 mm Paper Weight 52 g m2 135 g m2 16 lb 42 lb LCT B543 Paper Size A4 S LT S Paper Weight 60 g m2 105 g m2 16 ...

Page 448: ......

Page 449: ...BOOKLET FINISHER B546 ...

Page 450: ......

Page 451: ... Rear Stapling 7 Tow position Stapling 7 2 6 STAPLER 8 2 7 SHIFT TRAY MECHANISM 9 2 8 BOOKLET UNIT GATE MECHANISM 10 2 9 RELAY ROLLER AND POSITIONING PLATE MECHANISM 12 2 10 POSITIONING ROLLER MECHANISM 13 2 11 BOOKLET UNIT JOGGER MOVEMENT MECHANISM 14 2 12 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT 15 2 13 PAPER FOLDER MECHANISM 16 3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 18 3 1 REMOVAL 18 3 1 1 UPPER DOOR 18 3 1 2 UPPER REAR COV...

Page 452: ...1 16 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT 34 Removal 34 Adjustment 35 3 1 17 BOOKLET BOARD 37 3 1 18 POSITIONING PLATE UNIT 37 3 1 19 1ST AND 2ND BOOKLET UNIT GATES 38 3 2 ADJUSTMENT 39 3 2 1 SHIFT TRAY HEIGHT 39 3 2 2 JOGGER FENCE POSITION 40 3 2 3 STAPLING POSITION 41 3 2 4 BOOKLET STAPLING POSITION 42 ...

Page 453: ...of Tray Gate 10 Buffer Roller Entrance Gate 11 Booklet Gate 12 1st Transport Roller 13 Stapler Unit 14 Transport Belt 15 Booklet Unit Entrance Roller 16 1st Booklet Unit Gate 17 2nd Booklet Unit Gate 18 Anvil 19 Folder Plate 20 Positioning Plate 21 Shutter Guide 22 Booklet Tray 23 Exit Guide 24 Positioning Roller 25 Folder Roller 26 Relay Roller 27 Booklet Stapler Unit B546V500 WMF B546V501 WMF 1 ...

Page 454: ...ller entrance gate B are closed and the copy paper goes directly to the shift tray C Longer than A4 sideways The booklet gate proof tray gate D and buffer roller exit gate E are closed and the buffer roller entrance gate is opened The copy paper passes through the buffer roller F This paper path creates a distance between copies B546D564 PCX B546D565 PCX A B C D E F ...

Page 455: ...Y MODE The booklet gate A is closed The buffer roller entrance gate B and proof tray gate C are opened The copy paper goes to the proof tray D 2 1 3 BOOKLET STITCH MODE The booklet gate is opened and the copy paper goes to the booklet unit B546D101 WMF B546D102 WMF A B C D ...

Page 456: ...revious job is still being stapled It only works during the second and subsequent sets of a multi set copy job The buffer roller entrance gate A and buffer roller exit gate B are opened Then the 1st sheet of paper goes around the buffer roller C When the 2nd copy D comes to the buffer roller the buffer roller exit gate is closed The two sheets of paper go to the shift tray E or staple tray F B546D...

Page 457: ...uide B which contains the upper exit roller opens The paper switches back to the stopper C Then the front guide release solenoid D turns on and the front guide E is released the shift motor moves jogger fence F to the front and the copy paper shifts to the front by 30 mm After copy paper has been shifted the upper exit guide closes and the lower exit roller G turns in the opposite direction to fee...

Page 458: ...xit roller and feed belt E and it is aligned the by jogger motor The feed belt solenoid F turns on to move the feed belt to the stopper This function prevents excessive buckling of the paper between belt and stopper The paddles G send the paper to the stopper starting from the 2nd copy paper When the trailing edge of the 2nd copy paper passes the 2nd transport roller the paddle solenoid H turns on...

Page 459: ...oves to the center The stapler unit moves to the front or rear stapling position when the copy paper comes into the finisher and stays until the copy job finishes It returns to home position when the job is finished Two position Stapling When the print key is pressed the stapler unit moves to the center The stapler unit moves to the rear stapling position first and moves to the front stapling posi...

Page 460: ...am D When the guide roller moves to the highest position on the cam the copy paper is stapled The stapler unit contains the cartridge set switch E staple end switch F and staple position sensor G The staple position sensor detects whether the staple sheet has come to the staple unit or not B546D571 PCX B546D110 WMF B546D109 WMF A B C D D A E F G ...

Page 461: ...ng the lift motor sensors 1 D and 2 E The lift motor contains a thermoswitch F When it detects 73 5º C the finisher board stops the lift motor until its temperature reaches approximately 40º C The shutter position switch G cuts the lift motor power for safety when the upper exit guide plate opens The shift tray height sensor H detects the distance between the sensor and the top of the copy paper o...

Page 462: ...olenoid s C are energized to close the gate s in order to transport paper to the positioning plate D through a suitable paper path This is done for the following reasons To detect the trailing edge of paper with the correct sensor To prevent the leading edge of the next sheet from hitting the trailing edge of the previous sheets on the positioning plate B546D550 PCX B546D551 PCX B546D552 PCX B546D...

Page 463: ...een paper sizes and solenoids sensors A3 11 x 17 B4 11 x 14 A4 81 2 x 11 1st Solenoid Gate OFF Opened ON Closed ON Closed 2nd Solenoid Gate OFF Opened OFF Opened ON Closed A3 11 x 17 B4 11 x 14 A4 81 2 x 11 Trailing Edge Sensor 1 ON ON ON Trailing Edge Sensor 2 OFF ON ON Trailing Edge Sensor 3 OFF OFF ON ...

Page 464: ... paper to the positioning plate B When the trailing edge of the paper comes to the trailing edge sensor that the paper passes last the relay roller solenoid is de energized This solenoid on off cycle is done for each sheet of paper Before paper comes the positioning plate moves up from the home position to a position that is suitable for the selected paper size in order that the middle of the pape...

Page 465: ... B The positioning roller is not round but elliptical in shape so that it moves away from the paper while the paper is being horizontally aligned The positioning roller sensor C detects the actuator D on the roller shaft to determine the rotation of the positioning roller When the sensor is de actuated the roller is away from the paper and the jogger fences E start moving B546D555 PCX B546D554 PCX...

Page 466: ...re 10 mm from each of the paper side edges Each time a sheet of paper reaches the positioning plate B the jogger fences move toward the paper to align the paper once The fences move back a short distance and move forward again the paper to align for the second time Then the fences go back to the waiting position When the last sheet is aligned the fences stay at the aligning positions during stapli...

Page 467: ... then the front one This is for the following reasons To prevent paper from becoming waved in the area between the two stapled positions To minimize necessary electric power The staple hammer HP switch in each stapler detects a stapling cycle and the staple end sensor detects the presence of staples in the cartridge The stapler unit including the two staplers can be pulled out to enable staple car...

Page 468: ...aper arriving at the positioning plate from being caught by the rollers down to the home position Shortly after that the folder plate motor and the folder roller motor start rotating The folder plate A moves to push the middle of the stapled sheets of paper toward the folder rollers B until the folder plate return sensor C is de actuated Then the folder plate comes back to the home position After ...

Page 469: ...to fold the paper more firmly When the leading edge of the folded paper passes 20 mm from the folder rollers the folder roller motor reverses to feed the paper back 20 mm During this action the folder plate stays at the return position Then the folder roller motor rotates forward again to feed the set of papers out and the folder plate goes back to the home position ...

Page 470: ...REMOVAL B546 18 SM 3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3 1 REMOVAL 3 1 1 UPPER DOOR 1 Open the upper door A 2 Remove the lower hinge B x1 3 Push up the upper door and remove it B546R579 WMF A B ...

Page 471: ...t Finisher B546 3 1 2 UPPER REAR COVER 1 Hold up the proof tray and open the top cover A 2 Unhook the upper rear cover B and remove it x3 3 1 3 LOWER REAR COVER 1 Remove the lower rear cover C x4 B546R580 PCX B546R104 WMF A B C ...

Page 472: ...R 1 Hold up the upper tray A and open the top cover B 2 Push the hooks C of the top cover and remove it 3 1 5 UPPER INNER COVER 1 Open the upper door 2 Remove the upper inner cover A x 1 B546R581 PCX B546R580 PCX B546R582 PCX B C A A B ...

Page 473: ...ve the grounding wire B x 1 3 Unhook the two stoppers C and remove them 4 Remove the slide guide D by pulling it up 5 Remove the shift tray unit E by pulling it up NOTE When reinstalling the shift tray unit release the clutch gear F of the tray lift motor by carefully inserting a screwdriver B546R106 WMF B546R107 WMF B546R108 WMF A B E C D F ...

Page 474: ...ft tray unit down by releasing the clutch gear of the tray lift motor see Shift Tray Unit Removal 2 Remove the upper shift guide A x 6 5 x M4 1 x M3 3 1 8 LOWER SHIFT GUIDE 1 Remove the shift tray unit 2 Remove the lower shift guide A x 2 x 6 3 x M4 3 x M3 B546R112 WMF B546R109 WMF A A ...

Page 475: ...he connector A and remove the screw B that secures the transport belt unit C 3 Disconnect D x4 4 Hold up the exit unit E and remove it with the transport belt unit x 3 1 clamp NOTE When installing the exit unit make sure to position the exit unit guide plate black F over the transport guide plate G B546R113 WMF B546R114 WMF A B C E D F G ...

Page 476: ... upper rear cover and the top cover 2 Disconnect the connector A 3 Remove the upper shift guide B x 6 and the guide holder C x 2 4 Unhook the shafts D and remove the buffer roller unit E 2 clamps B546R583 PCX B546R112 WMF B546R585 PCX B546R584 PCX A D B C D E ...

Page 477: ...ooklet Finisher B546 3 1 11 STAPLER 1 Open the upper front door 2 Slide the stapler A towards the front 3 Remove the stapler x 1 x 1 B 4 Remove the cover C from the stapler x 2 B546R586 PCX B546R587 PCX B546R588 PCX A B C ...

Page 478: ...isher board A x 4 x 19 3 Do the following adjustments after replacing the board Shift tray height Jogger fence position Stapling position 4 If you need to release the setting for the maximum number of stacks allowed on the shift tray in the staple mode set DIP S3 No 5 to ON B546R589 PCX A ...

Page 479: ...T UNIT 1 Remove the following items Upper and lower rear covers Shift tray unit Lower shift guide 2 Remove the lower right cover A x 4 3 Remove the folder roller knob B x 1 stepped 4 Remove the lower inner cover C and lower door D x 5 B546R561 WMF A B C D ...

Page 480: ...e lower booklet exit guide C and remove it 1 L pin D x 2 E 7 Remove the right front and right rear covers F G x 2 ea 8 Disconnect the two connectors H 9 Remove the two joints I and then pull out the booklet unit J from the right side x 3 B546R110 WMF B546R101 WMF B546R111 WMF A B C D E F G H I J I ...

Page 481: ...46 Booklet Finisher B546 3 1 14 FOLDER ROLLERS 1 Remove the booklet unit 2 Remove the drive unit A x 4 B x 3 C 3 Remove the front and rear tension springs D B546R590 PCX B546R593 PCX B546R591 PCX B546R592 PCX A D D B C ...

Page 482: ...REMOVAL B546 30 SM 4 Remove the gears A and ball bearings B 4 C rings 5 Remove the front and rear tighteners C x 1 stepped ea B546R593 PCX B546R595 PCX B546R596 PCX B546R597 PCX B546R598 PCX A B B C C ...

Page 483: ...REMOVAL SM 31 B546 Booklet Finisher B546 6 Remove the jogger plates A x 1 ea 7 Slide the folder rollers B to the front and remove them B546R599 PCX B546R549 PCX A B ...

Page 484: ...d lower inner cover Booklet board 2 Release the harness A from the clamps 3 Insert two positioning screws B in the holes provided in the folder table C 4 Tighten the screws until the ends touch the securing plate D for the folder plate 5 Remove the folder plate E and the securing plate x 3 B546R117 WMF B546R116 WMF B C D A D E ...

Page 485: ... of electrical tape C along the line where they meet see the illustration NOTE 1 Be sure to fold the two strips back toward you so that they can easily be removed 2 Be careful not to attach the tape too close to the three screw holes 3 Reattach the two plates A B to the folder table D x 3 NOTE Tighten these three screws while holding the securing plate against the two positioning screws E that wer...

Page 486: ...L B546 34 SM 3 1 16 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT Removal 1 Remove the lower door and inner cover 2 Remove the guide roller A and shaft B 1 E ring 3 Pull out the booklet stapler unit C B546R562 PCX B546R563 PCX A B C ...

Page 487: ...5 B546 Booklet Finisher B546 Adjustment 1 Remove the booklet stapler cover A x 3 2 Remove the three paper guides B x 1 ea 3 Loosen the two screws on each of the anvils C B546R564 PCX B546R565 PCX B546R567 PCX A B C ...

Page 488: ... slot of the stapler B NOTE The anvil positioning plate is stored in the booklet stapler cover C 5 Rotate the gear to move down the stapler Then align the anvil positioning plate and the anvil D Then secure the anvils x 2 ea B546R568 PCX B546R569 PCX B546R570 PCX A B A C A D ...

Page 489: ...over A x 4 2 Remove the booklet board B x 4 x 14 NOTE After replacing the board adjust the booklet stapling position 3 1 18 POSITIONING PLATE UNIT 1 Remove the booklet board x 4 x 14 2 Slide the paper positioning unit C to the right and remove it x 2 x 2 D B546R115 WMF B546R571 PCX A B C D ...

Page 490: ...r and lower rear covers 2 Release the two tension springs A of the booklet entrance guide B 3 Remove the booklet unit gate solenoids C x 1 1 spring each 4 Pull out the link of the solenoid D 5 Remove the booklet unit gates E B546R572 PCX B546R573 PCX B546R574 PCX A B A C D E ...

Page 491: ...h 1 SW1 on the finisher board The finisher automatically adjusts the shift tray height when switch 1 is pressed After performing the adjustment the shift tray will return to home position During the adjustment LED 1 flashes After performing the adjustment LED 1 turns on and remains on If the automatic adjustment fails the finisher stops and LED 1 turns off 5 Turn off dip switches 3 1 and 4 then tu...

Page 492: ...fences will move to the A4 or 81 2 x 11 position 4 Place 10 sheets of A4 81 2 x 11 paper between the jogger fences and push them until they touch the shutters 5 Adjust the jogger fence position by pressing switch 1 or 2 Switch 1 Move to the front 0 35 mm press Switch 2 Move to the rear 0 35 mm press 6 Press switches 1 and 2 simultaneously to store the adjustment data After pressing the switches th...

Page 493: ...s and push it until it touches the shutter When the staple tray paper sensor detects the paper the stapler will staple rear 1 point 5 Take out the stapled paper manually and check the staple position Staple position Good Turn off dip switches 3 1 and 2 to end the procedure Staple position No good Change the staple position by doing the following steps 6 Adjust the staple position by pressing switc...

Page 494: ... Tape the actuators of the booklet entrance guide sensor S42 and the booklet entrance guide safety switch SW11 so that S42 and SW11 remain actuated 4 Press switch 2 SW2 on the booklet board After pressing the switch the booklet transport motor M10 will start to rotate 5 Put a mark on the trailing edge of some A3 11 x 17 paper two sheets SW2 Dip Switch 1 LED 1 B546R557 WMF 1 Dip Switch 1 2 3 5 6 7 ...

Page 495: ...B546 6 Open the booklet entrance guide A then slide in the two sheets of paper B until their leading edges touch the positioning plate 7 Press switch 2 on the booklet board The booklet finisher makes a booklet automatically B546R548 PCX A B ...

Page 496: ...ple 1 To move the stapling position 1 mm towards the leading edge If dip switch 1 is currently set to 2 set the dip switch to reflect 2 this moves the stapling position 4 steps towards the leading edge Example 2 To move the stapling position 0 75 mm away from the leading edge If dip switch 1 is currently set to 1 set the dip switch to reflect 2 this move s the stapling position 3 steps away from t...

Page 497: ...AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER B541 ...

Page 498: ......

Page 499: ...OTOR SKEW CORRECTION ROLLER CLUTCH 8 1 12 EXIT SENSOR 9 1 13 STAMP SOLENOID 9 1 14 CONTROLLER BOARD 9 2 TROUBLESHOOTING 10 2 1 TIMING CHARTS 10 2 1 1 A4 S LT S SINGLE SIDE ORIGINAL MODE 10 2 1 2 A4 S LT S DOUBLE SIDED ORIGINAL MODE 11 2 2 JAM DETECTION 12 3 SERVICE TABLES 13 3 1 DIP SWITCHES 13 3 2 TEST POINTS 13 3 3 FUSES 13 4 DETAILED DESCRIPTION 14 4 1 MAIN COMPONENTS 14 DRIVE LAYOUT 15 4 3 ORI...

Page 500: ...B541 ii SM 4 5 1 SINGLE SIDED ORIGINALS 21 4 5 2 DOUBLE SIDED ORIGINALS 22 4 6 STAMP 23 4 7 DF70 SOFTWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY 24 ...

Page 501: ... x1 x1 5 Platen sheet E Velcro pads 6 Original exit tray F x2 Slide to the right and then pull out CAUTION The hinge of the ARDF is spring loaded and becomes much lighter with all the covers removed After removing all the covers lay a heavy book on the front right corner of the ARDF to prevent it from springing up unexpectedly B351R111 WMF B351R110 WMF A B D E F C ...

Page 502: ... 1 2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT 1 Open the top cover 2 Original feed unit A Press it toward you on its shaft to release and lift out 1 3 ORIGINAL PICK UP ROLLER 1 Original feed unit 1 2 2 Pick up roller A x1 B351R101 WMF B351R102 WMF A A ...

Page 503: ...riginal pick up roller 1 2 1 3 2 Shaft A x1 spring x1 NOTE Before removing the shaft note carefully the positioning of the spring B This must be reset during re installation 3 Feed belt cover C Timing belt gear shaft springs x2 NOTE Do not lose the springs 4 Original feed belt D B351R104 WMF B351R103 WMF A B C D ...

Page 504: ...ECTION INTERVAL REGISTRATION ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS 1 Open the top cover 2 Upper original guide A x3 3 Skew correction sensor B x1 4 Interval sensor C x1 5 Registration sensor D x1 6 Original width sensor bracket E x1 x4 7 Original width sensors F B351R106 WMF B351R105 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 505: ...AL LENGTH SENSORS 1 Raise the original table 2 Lower cover of original tray A x4 3 Original length sensor 1 B x1 4 Original length sensor 2 C x1 1 7 SEPARATION ROLLER 1 Original feed unit 1 2 2 Separation roller cover A 3 Separation roller B x1 B351R107 WMF B351R108 WMF A B A B C ...

Page 506: ...se the original tray before you re install the paper feed guide 5 Separation roller torque limiter x1 1 7 6 Bracket C x1 x1 7 Inverter sensor D x1 8 Original set sensor E x1 1 9 PICK UP MOTOR ORIGINAL STOPPER HP SENSOR PICK UP HP SENSOR 1 Rear cover 1 1 2 Pick up motor A x1 x2 Timing belt 3 Sensor bracket B x2 x1 4 Pick up HP sensor C 5 Original stopper HP sensor D B351R109 WMF B351R114 WMF A B C ...

Page 507: ...MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR 1 Rear cover 1 1 2 Pick up roller assembly A x1 x3 x3 3 Motor bracket B x3 x2 Timing belt x2 4 Scanner motor C x2 NOTE To re install the scanner motor secure the motor after the motor bracket has been installed 5 Inverter motor D x2 B351R113 WMF B351R112 WMF A B C D ...

Page 508: ...EW CORRECTION ROLLER CLUTCH 1 Rear cover 1 1 2 Motor bracket A x5 x1 3 Feed motor B spring C x1 NOTE To re install the feed motor secure the motor after the motor bracket has been installed 4 Clutch stopper D x1 5 Skew correction roller clutch E x1 B351R115 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 509: ... exit guide plate B 4 Exit guide plate cover C x2 5 Exit sensor D x1 x1 1 13 STAMP SOLENOID 1 Rear cover front cover platen sheet exit tray 1 1 2 Open the original guide A 3 Plate B x1 4 Stamp solenoid C x1 x1 1 14 CONTROLLER BOARD 1 Rear cover 1 1 2 Controller board A x4 all B351R116 WMF B351R201 WMF B351R202 WMF A B C D A A B C ...

Page 510: ... ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF CCW OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF Original Set Sensor Pick up Motor Original Stopper H P Sn Original Pick up H P Sn Feed Motor Feed Clutch Skew Correction Sn Interval Sn Registration Sn Transport Motor DF Gate Exit Sn Inverter Motor 1600 pps 1600 pps 600 pps 4400 pps 4320 pps 10866 pps JAM1 JAM2 JAM3 JAM4 JAM5 JAM6 JAM7 ms CCW OFF CW B351D500 WMF ...

Page 511: ...N OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF CCW OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF CW ON OFF ON OFF Pick up Motor Original Stopper H P Sn Original Pick up H P Sn Feed Motor Feed Clutch Skew Correction Sn Interval Sn Transport Motor Registration Sn DF Gate Exit Sn Inverter Motor Inverter Sol Inverter Sn 1600 pps 1600 pps 6000 pps 4400 pps 4320 pps 10866 pps 1886 pps 73 mm 1500 pps 4400 pps 1995 pps JAM9 JAM8 ms CCW OFF C...

Page 512: ...l 91 4 mm Transport jam Jam 4 The interval sensor does not turn on after the feed motor has fed the original 70 7 mm Registration sensor Jam 5 The registration sensor does not turn on after the interval sensor turned on and the original has been fed 74 1 mm Exit jam Jam 6 The exit sensor does not turn on after the transport motor has fed the original 124 mm Exit jam Jam 7 The exit sensor does not ...

Page 513: ...s 2 phase 0 1 1 1 Inverter motor rotation 6000 pps 1 2 phase 1 0 0 0 Free run one sided original 100 1 0 0 1 Free run one sided original 30 1 0 1 0 Free run one sided original 71 1 0 1 1 Free run one sided original 200 1 1 0 0 Free run two sided original 100 1 1 0 1 Free run two sided original 200 1 1 1 0 Free run one sided fax mode 32 6 1 1 1 1 Free run one sided mixed original size mode 100 3 2 ...

Page 514: ...er 17 Skew correction roller 9 Exit roller 18 Feed belt Pick up Mechanism Picks up the originals for scanning Feed Separation Mechanism Comprised of the feed belt and separation roller feeds and separates the originals and corrects skew Original Size Detection Sensors Comprised of 4 width sensors and 2 length sensors detect the sizes of the originals Original Transport Mechanism Comprised of the t...

Page 515: ...er B541 4 2 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Feed motor 7 Inverter roller 2 Feed belt 8 Exit roller 3 Pick up roller 9 Separation roller 4 Pick up motor 10 Transport roller 5 Transport motor 11 Skew correction roller 6 Inverter motor B351D102 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ...

Page 516: ...two original length sensors B and C The machine determines the original width when the leading edge of the original activates the registration sensor The ARDF detects the original size by combining the readings of four width sensors and two length sensors This integrated detection mechanism is detailed in the table on the next page B351D110 WMF B B5 C LG A ...

Page 517: ...B5 S 257 x 182 mm ON ON A5 L 148 x 210 mm A5 S 210 x 148 mm ON B6 L 128 x 182 mm B6 S 182 x 128 mm DLT L 11 x 17 ON ON ON ON ON 11 x 15 L ON ON ON ON ON 10 x 14 L ON ON ON ON LG L 8 x 14 ON ON ON F4 L 8 x 13 ON ON ON F L 8 x 13 ON ON ON LT L 8 5 x 11 ON ON LT S 11 x 8 5 ON ON ON 7 x 10 L ON ON 10 x 7 S ON ON ON 8 x 10 L ON ON HLT L 5 x 8 HLT S 8 x 5 ON 267 x 390 mm ON ON ON ON ON 195 x 267 mm ON O...

Page 518: ... below cannot be determined the image cannot be correctly scaled reduced or enlarged or processed until the document length has been accurately detected The length must be determined before the image is scanned Auto Reduce Enlarge Centering Erase Center Border Booklet Image Repeat An original follows this path during transport 1 Document length detection Scanning glass Inverter table 2 Inverter ta...

Page 519: ...nal set sensor C When Start is pressed the pick up motor D turns on and the original stopper cam E rotates The original stopper lowers and releases the original Next the pick up roller cam F lowers the pick up roller and then the feed motor G turns on to feed the top sheet of paper After being fed from the pick up roller the top sheet is separated from the stack by the separation roller H and the ...

Page 520: ...per slightly until it presses against the skew correction roller C and buckles slightly to correct any skew 4 4 3 REDUCING THE INTERVAL BETWEEN PAGES After performing skew correction the feed motor runs at a speed higher than its original speed in order for the next original to catch up to the one ahead of it This reduces the gap between the leading edge of the next original with the trailing edge...

Page 521: ...sport motor drives the transport roller A and the exit roller B When the leading edge of the original activates the interval sensor C the transport motor rotates the transport roller The transport roller then feeds the original through scanning area After scanning the original is fed out by the exit roller to the exit tray B351D104 WMF A B C ...

Page 522: ...e junction gate D closes Next the inverter motor turns on and the inverter roller E starts rotating to feed the original from the reverse table Then the original is fed to the transport roller and the scanning area F where the reverse side is scanned After scanning the reverse side of the original the original is then sent to the reverse table G a second time and turned over This ensures that the ...

Page 523: ...r C When the original reaches the stamp the transport motor stops and the stamp solenoid turns on if the page is sent successfully immediate transmission or stored successfully memory transmission After stamping the ARDF feed motor re starts to feed out the document NOTE The position of the stamp can be adjusted with the Stamp Position Adjustment SP mode B351D201 WMF A B C ...

Page 524: ...everse paper exit speed can be adjusted as follows ADF DIPSW bit4 OFF 4310pps pulses per sec ON 4166pps This bit is set at the factory depending on which setting produces less noise most cases set to ON However in the field if a noise occurs after replacing the motor or ADF controller this can be eliminated or at least minimized by changing the bit to the opposite setting e g ON OFF B3515620 G Jun...

Page 525: ...LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B543 ...

Page 526: ......

Page 527: ...ay lowering conditions 7 2 3 TRAY UNIT SLIDE MECHANISM 8 3 SERVICE TABLES 9 3 1 DIP SWITCHES 9 3 2 test points 9 3 3 switches 9 3 4 fuses 9 4 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 10 4 1 COVER REPLACEMENT 10 Tray Cover 10 Front Cover 10 Rear Cover 10 Right Lower Cover 10 Upper Cover 10 4 2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT 11 4 2 1 PAPER FEED SEPARATION AND PICK UP rollerS 11 Pick up Roller 11 Paper Feed Roller 11 Separati...

Page 528: ......

Page 529: ...CATIONS Paper Size A4 sideways LT sideways Paper Weight 60 g m2 105 g m2 16 lb 28 lb Tray Capacity 1500 sheets 80 g m2 20lb Remaining Paper Detection 5 steps 100 75 50 25 Near end Power Source 24 Vdc 5 Vdc from copier Power Consumption 40 W Weight 17 kg Size W x D x H 390 mm x 500 mm x 390 mm ...

Page 530: ...CAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B543 2 SM 1 2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 Relay Roller 2 Relay Sensor 3 Paper Feed Roller 4 Pick up Roller 5 Paper End Sensor 6 Paper Tray 7 Separation Roller A683V500 WMF 2 7 3 4 5 1 6 ...

Page 531: ...T Motor 4 Paper Height 1 Sensor 5 Paper Height 2 Sensor 6 Paper Height 3 Sensor 7 Main Board 8 Side Fence Position Sensor 9 Lower Limit Sensor 10 LCT Set Sensor 11 Tray Cover Switch 12 Lift Motor 13 Down Switch 14 Relay Sensor 15 Paper End Sensor 16 Lift Sensor 17 Pick up Solenoid A683V501 WMF 10 6 5 7 4 3 2 1 8 9 12 11 13 14 15 16 17 ...

Page 532: ... the LCT motor 9 S5 Paper Height 1 Detects the paper height 4 S6 Paper Height 2 Detects the paper height 5 S7 Paper Height 3 Detects the paper height 6 S8 LCT Set Detects whether the LCT is correctly set or not 10 S9 Side Fence Position Detects when the side fence is set at the A4 size position 8 Switches SW1 Tray Cover Stops the LCT lift motor when the tray cover is opened 11 SW2 Down Lowers the ...

Page 533: ...OUT SM 5 B543 1 5 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Relay Clutch 2 Paper Feed Clutch 3 LCT Motor 4 Tray Bottom Plate 5 Pick up Roller 6 Tray Drive Belts 7 Lift Motor 8 Separation Roller 9 Paper Feed Roller 10 Relay Roller A683V502 WMF 6 4 5 3 2 1 10 9 8 7 ...

Page 534: ... FEED MECHANISM This machine uses the FRR Feed and Reverse Roller paper feed system paper feed roller A separation roller B pick up roller C When the start key is pressed the pick up solenoid D energizes and the pick up roller touches the paper A683D500 WMF A D C B ...

Page 535: ...er the tray cover is closed Just after leaving the energy saving mode Tray lowering conditions In the following conditions the lift motor lowers the tray bottom plate until the lower limit E sensor turns on Just after the paper end sensor turns on Just after the down switch is pressed by the user The amount of the paper in the tray is detected by combination of high low outputs from three sensors ...

Page 536: ...am between the copier and the LCT the user releases the lock lever A and can slide the LCT away from the copier to remove the jammed paper When sliding the LCT back into position the LCT is secured against the copier in the correct position by the docking pins B on the LCT A683D502 WMF B A ...

Page 537: ...chine has no jam detection 2 Set DPS101 for the free run as shown above 3 Turn the main switch off wait a few seconds then switch back on 4 Press SW101 to start the free run 5 To stop the free run press SW102 3 2 TEST POINTS No Label Monitored Signal TP100 24 V 24 V TP101 GND Ground TP103 TXD TXD to the copier TP104 RXD RXD from the copier TP105 5 V 5 V TP106 GND Ground 3 3 SWITCHES No Function SW...

Page 538: ...g Front Cover 1 Remove the front cover B 2 screws Rear Cover 1 Remove the tray cover 2 Remove the cover hinge C 2 screws 3 Remove the rear cover D 3 screws Right Lower Cover 1 Remove the right lower cover E 2 screws Upper Cover 1 Remove the front cover 2 Remove the rear cover 3 Remove the upper cover F A683R500 WMF D F B E A C ...

Page 539: ...n switch to lower the tray bottom plate until it reaches its lowest position 2 Open the tray cover Pick up Roller 3 Replace the pick up roller A 1 snap ring Paper Feed Roller 3 Replace the paper feed roller B 1 snap ring Separation Roller 3 Remove the guide plate C 2 screws 4 Replace the separation roller D 1 snap ring A683R501 WMF D C A B ...

Page 540: ...ND PAPER END SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1 Remove the front and rear cover 2 Remove the upper cover 3 Remove the sensor bracket A 1 screw Tray Lift Sensor 3 Replace the tray lift sensor B 1 connector Paper End Sensor 3 Replace the paper end sensor C 1 connector A683R502 WMF C A B ...

Page 541: ...B543 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT SM 13 B543 4 4 RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1 Pull out the LCT 2 Remove the joint guide A 4 screws 3 Remove the sensor bracket B 1 screw 4 Replace the relay sensor C 1 connector A683R503 WMF C A B ...

Page 542: ...ON CHANGE 1 Push the down switch to lower the tray bottom plate until it reaches its lowest position 2 Remove the tray cover 3 Remove the front and rear side fences A B 1 screw each 4 Install the side fences in the correct position A683R504 WMF A4 A B LT A4 LT ...

Page 543: ...PAPER TRAY UNIT B542 ...

Page 544: ......

Page 545: ...ACEMENT 5 Upper Paper Feed Unit 6 Lower Paper Feed Unit 6 1 6 PAPER END TRAY LIFT AND RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT 7 Paper End Sensor 7 Tray Lift Sensor 7 Relay Sensor 7 2 SERVICE TABLES 8 2 1 DIP SWITCHES 8 2 2 test points 8 2 3 switches 8 2 4 fuses 8 3 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONs 9 3 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 9 3 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 10 3 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 11 3 4 DRIVE LAYOUT...

Page 546: ......

Page 547: ...g m2 105 g m2 16 lb 28 lb Tray Capacity 500 sheets 80 g m2 20 lb x 2 Paper Feed System FRR Feed and Reverse Roller Paper Height Detection 4 steps 100 70 30 Near end Power Source 24 Vdc 5 Vdc from the copier 120 Vac 115 V version from the copier 220 240 Vac 224 240 V version from the copier Power Consumption 50 W Weight 25 kg Size W x D x H 540 mm x 600 mm x 270 mm ...

Page 548: ...NT LAYOUT 1 Upper Pick up Roller 2 Upper Paper Feed Roller 3 Upper Relay Roller 4 Upper Separation Roller 5 Lower Relay Roller 6 Lower Paper Feed Roller 7 Lower Separation Roller 8 Lower Pick up Roller 9 Lower Tray 10 Upper Tray A682V500 WMF 10 9 8 5 6 7 4 3 2 1 ...

Page 549: ... Upper Paper Feed Clutch 8 Tray Lift Motor 9 Lower Paper Feed Clutch 10 Vertical Guide Switch 11 Lower Lift Sensor 12 Lower Paper End Sensor 13 Lower Relay Sensor 14 Upper Relay Sensor 15 Upper Paper End Sensor 16 Lower Paper Height 2 Sensor 17 Lower Paper Height 1 Sensor 18 Upper Paper Height 2 Sensor 19 Upper Paper Height 1 Sensor A682V501 WMF 8 1 17 16 18 19 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 2 3 4 5 7 6 ...

Page 550: ...eds 14 S6 Lower Relay Detects misfeeds 13 S7 Upper Paper Height 1 Detects the amount of paper in the upper tray 17 S8 Upper Paper Height 2 Detects the amount of paper in the upper tray 16 S9 Lower Paper Height 1 Detects the amount of paper in the lower tray 19 S10 Lower Paper Height 2 Detects the amount of paper in the lower tray 18 Switches SW1 Upper Tray Informs the copier when the upper tray is...

Page 551: ...h 3 Upper Paper Feed Clutch 4 Lower Paper Feed Clutch 5 Lower Relay Roller 6 Lower Separation Roller 7 Lower Paper Feed Roller 8 Lower Pick up Roller 9 Upper Separation Roller 10 Upper Relay Roller 11 Upper Paper Feed Roller 12 Upper Pick up Roller A682V502 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ...

Page 552: ... unit the separation roller B is away from the paper feed roller C and the pick up roller D stays in the upper position When the paper tray is put into the paper tray unit it pushes the release lever E This causes the pick up roller to move down top diagram and the separation roller to move into contact with the paper feed roller bottom diagram A682500 WMF A682D501 WMF E A D A E B C ...

Page 553: ...hen the paper tray B is placed in the machine When the machine detects that the paper tray is in the machine the tray lift motor C rotates and the coupling gear D on the tray lift motor engages the pin E on the lift arm shaft F Then the tray lift arm G lifts the tray bottom plate H A682D502 WMF E C A D H F G B ...

Page 554: ... up roller supporter activates the lift sensor C to stop the tray lift motor After several paper feed cycles the paper level gradually lowers and the lift sensor is de activated The tray lift motor turns on again until this sensor is activated again When the tray is drawn out of the machine the tray lift motor coupling gear disengages the pin on the lift arm shaft and the tray bottom plate then dr...

Page 555: ... is raised by the paper stack and the paper end sensor B is deactivated When the paper tray runs out of paper the paper end feeler drops into the cutout C in the tray bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated When the paper tray is drawn out the paper end feeler is lifted up by the pick up roller supporter D A682D503 WMF C D A B ...

Page 556: ...ensors A and B When the amount of 2 paper decreases the bottom plate pressure lever C moves up and the actuator D which is mounted on the same drive shaft as the pressure lever rotates The following combination of sensor signals is sent to the copier Amount of Paper Paper Height Sensor 1 Paper Height Sensor 2 Full OFF ON Near Full ON ON Near End 1 ON OFF Near End 2 OFF OFF A C B D Full Near Full N...

Page 557: ...ollows 1 Remove the paper from the tray this is because the machine has no jam detection 2 Set DPS101 for the required free run as shown above 3 Turn the main power switch off wait a few seconds then switch on 4 Press SW101 to start the free run 5 To stop the free run press SW102 3 2 TEST POINTS No Label Monitored Signal TP100 24 V 24 V TP101 GND Ground TP103 TXD TXD to the copier TP104 RXD RXD fr...

Page 558: ...COVER REPLACEMENT B542 12 SM 4 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 4 1 COVER REPLACEMENT Right Cover 1 Remove the right cover A 2 screws Rear Cover 1 Remove the rear cover B 2 screws A682R500 WMF A B ...

Page 559: ...EMENT 4 2 1 PAPER FEED SEPARATION AND PICK UP ROLLERS 1 Remove the paper tray Pick up Roller 2 Replace the pick up roller A Paper Feed Roller 2 Replace the paper feed roller B 1 snap ring Separation Roller 2 Replace the separation roller C 1 snap ring A682R501 WMF B C A ...

Page 560: ...TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT B542 14 SM 4 3 TRAY MOTOR REPLACEMENT 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the tray motor A 1 connector 3 screws A682R502 WMF A ...

Page 561: ...over 2 Remove the upper paper feed clutch holder A 2 screws 3 Remove the lower paper feed clutch holder B 2 screws 4 Remove the gear holder C 3 screws 1 spring 1 bearing 5 Replace the relay clutch D 1 connector 6 Replace the upper feed clutch E 1 bushing 1 connector 7 Replace the lower feed clutch F 1 connector A682R503 WMF A D C B E F ...

Page 562: ...FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the upper and lower paper feed clutch holder 3 Remove the gear holder 4 Remove the upper feed clutch A or lower feed clutch B 5 Remove the upper or lower gear C D A682R504 WMF A682R505 WMF C A B D ...

Page 563: ...emove the vertical transport cover B of the copier 1 snap ring 8 Remove the upper paper feed unit C 2 screws 1 connector Lower Paper Feed Unit 6 Remove the docking bracket D 1 screw 7 Remove the vertical transport guide E 2 screws 8 Remove the lower paper feed unit F 2 screws 1 connector A682R507 WMF A682R506 WMF D F E A B C ...

Page 564: ...RELAY SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1 Remove the paper feed unit Paper End Sensor 2 Replace the paper end sensor A 1 connector Tray Lift Sensor 2 Replace the tray lift sensor B 1 connector Relay Sensor 2 Remove the sensor bracket C 1 screw 3 Replace the relay sensor D 1 connector A682R508 WMF A D B C ...

Page 565: ...1 BIN TRAY B544 ...

Page 566: ......

Page 567: ...UT 2 1 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 3 1 4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 4 2 1 BASICS OPERATION 4 3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 5 3 1 COVER REMOVAL 5 Front Cover 5 Upper Cover 5 Rear Cover 5 3 2 PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT 6 3 3 ENTRANCE AND PAPER LIMIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT 7 Paper Limit Sensor 7 Entrance Sensor 7 ...

Page 568: ......

Page 569: ...ORMATION 1 1 SPECIFICATIONS Paper Size A5 lengthwise to A3 HLT to DLT Paper Weight 60 g m2 105 g m2 16 lb 28 lb Tray Capacity 125 sheets 80 g m2 20 lb Power Source 5 Vdc 24 Vdc from copier Power Consumption 15 W Weight 4 kg Size W x D x H 470 mm x 550 mm x 110 mm ...

Page 570: ...D DRIVE LAYOUT B544 2 SM 1 2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Paper Limit Sensor 2 Exit Roller 3 Entrance Sensor 4 Entrance Roller 5 Paper Sensor 6 Paper Tray 7 Tray Motor B376V500 WMF B376V501 WMF 2 6 4 7 6 3 4 5 1 2 ...

Page 571: ...M1 Tray Drives the entrance and exit rollers 3 Sensors S1 Entrance Checks for misfeeds 7 S2 Paper Limit Detects the paper stack limit in the tray 5 S3 Paper Detects whether there is paper in the tray 6 S4 Motor Lock Detects whether the tray motor is turning 1 Switches SW1 Right Cover Detects whether the right cover is opened 4 PCBs PCB1 Main Controls the 1 bin tray and communicates with the copier...

Page 572: ...pulses for 300 ms while the tray motor is on the copier will stop and display an SC code The paper sensor D checks whether there is paper in the tray or not The paper sensor turns on when paper is stacked in the tray and the paper indicator is turned on The paper limit sensor E detects when the tray is full While a sheet of copy paper is passing this sensor the sensor feeler is always pushed up by...

Page 573: ... COVER REMOVAL Front Cover 1 Remove the scanner unit if it is at the front 2 Remove the front cover A 1 screw Upper Cover 1 Remove the scanner unit 2 Remove the upper cover B 2 screws Rear Cover 1 Remove the scanner unit 2 Remove the rear cover C 2 screws B376R500 WMF A B C ...

Page 574: ...PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT B544 6 SM 3 2 PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1 Remove the front cover 2 Remove the exit guide plate A 1 screw 3 Replace the paper sensor B 1 connector B376R501 WMF B A ...

Page 575: ...3 ENTRANCE AND PAPER LIMIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1 Remove the front and upper covers Paper Limit Sensor 2 Replace the paper limit sensor A 1 connector Entrance Sensor 2 Remove the sensor bracket B 1 screw 1 spring 3 Replace the entrance sensor C 1 connector B376R502 WMF C B A ...

Page 576: ......

Page 577: ...1000 SHEET FINISHER B408 ...

Page 578: ......

Page 579: ...1 4 5 STACK FEED OUT MOTOR 7 2 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 2 1 JAM DETECTION 8 3 SERVICE TABLES 9 3 1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS 9 4 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 10 4 1 GENERAL LAYOUT 10 4 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 11 4 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 13 4 4 DRIVE LAYOUT 15 4 5 JUNCTION GATES 16 Upper Tray Mode 16 Sort Stack Mode 16 Staple Mode 16 4 6 UPPER TRAY 17 4 7 LOWER TRAY UP DOWN MECHANISMS 18 4 8 PAPER SH...

Page 580: ......

Page 581: ...urn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section NOTE This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring 1 1 MAIN PCB 1 Rear cover A x 2 2 Main PCB B x 4 All B408R110 WMF B408R109 WMF B A ...

Page 582: ...it guide plate B 3 Upper side cover C x 2 4 Front cover support plate D x 1 5 Front cover E 6 Front inner cover F x 2 7 Harness G 8 Unhook the spring H 9 Turn the stapler unit I and take it out 10 Bracket J x 2 B408R102 WMF B408R113 WMF B408R114 WMF A B C D E F G H I J ...

Page 583: ...000 Sheet Finisher B408 MOTORS SM 3 B408 1 3 MOTORS 1 3 1 SHIFT MOTOR 1 Rear cover 1 1 2 Shift motor A x 2 x 1 1 3 2 STAPLER MOTOR 1 Rear cover 1 1 2 Stapler motor A x 2 x 1 B408R123 WMF B408R124 WMF A A ...

Page 584: ...ANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR 1 Rear cover 1 1 2 Motor assembly A x 4 x 2 3 Upper transport motor B x 4 4 Exit motor C x 4 1 3 4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 Main PCB 1 1 2 Lower transport motor A x 2 x 1 B408R112 WMF B408R111 WMF A B C A ...

Page 585: ... AND SENSORS 1 4 1 PREPARATION 1 Front cover and inner cover 1 2 2 Upper side cover A x 2 3 Upper tray B x 1 4 Lower side cover C x 2 5 Loosen the 2 screws D 6 Lower the lower tray guide plate E 7 Guide plate F x 4 B408R116 WMF B408R117 WMF B408R118 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 586: ...ND SENSORS B408 6 SM 1 4 2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR 1 Stack height sensor assembly A x 1 2 Stack height sensor B x 1 1 4 3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR 1 Stapler tray paper sensor A x 1 B408R121 WMF B408R120 WMF A B A ...

Page 587: ...00 Sheet Finisher B408 MOTORS AND SENSORS SM 7 B408 1 4 4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR 1 Lower tray lift motor A x 2 x 1 1 4 5 STACK FEED OUT MOTOR 1 Stack feed out motor A x 2 x 1 B408R119 WMF B408R122 WMF A A ...

Page 588: ... off Tray exit sensor Off check The tray exit sensor does not turn off within the normal time after it turns on Stapler tray entrance sensor On check The stapler tray entrance sensor does not switch on within the normal time after the entrance sensor switched on Stapler tray entrance sensor Off check The staple tray entrance sensor does not turn off within the normal time after it turns on Lower t...

Page 589: ...the table below SW100 1 2 Description 0 0 Normal operation mode Default 1 0 Packing mode Before packing the machine do the following Set switch 1 to 1 then back to zero The lower tray moves to the lowest position Then turn off the main switch After unpacking the machine do the following After turning the main switch back on the lower tray returns to home position automatically ...

Page 590: ...per Tray Exit Roller 3 Entrance Roller 4 Tray Junction Gate 5 Upper Transport Roller 6 Stapler Junction Gate 7 Lower Transport Rollers 8 Stapler 9 Stack Feed out Belt 10 Positioning Roller 11 Shift Roller 12 Lower Tray 13 Lower Tray Exit Roller B408D101 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ...

Page 591: ...ight Sensor 8 Lower Tray Exit Sensor 9 Lower Tray Upper Limit Switch 10 Shift HP Sensor 11 Shift Motor 12 Jogger Fence HP Sensor 13 Positioning Roller Solenoid 14 Stapler HP Sensor 15 Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor 16 Stapler Tray Paper Sensor 17 Stapler Hammer Motor 18 Staple Sheet Sensor 19 Stack Feed out Belt HP Sensor 20 Stapler Rotation HP Sensor 21 Staple Sensor B408D102 WMF B408D103 WMF 1 2 3...

Page 592: ...Lower Tray Lift Motor 24 Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor 25 Stapler Motor 26 Jogger Fence Motor 27 Stack Feed out Motor 28 Main Board 29 Lower Transport Motor 30 Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid 31 Exit Motor 32 Upper Transport Motor B408D104 WMF 23 24 25 26 27 28 22 29 30 31 32 ...

Page 593: ...2 S3 Jogger Fence HP Detects when the jogger fence is at home position 12 S4 Shift HP Detects when the shift roller is at home position 10 S5 Stack Feed out Belt HP Detects when the stack feed out belt is at home position 19 S6 Stapler HP Detects when the stapler is at home position 14 S7 Exit Guide Plate HP Detects when the exit guide plate is at home position 5 S8 Stapler Tray Entrance Detects c...

Page 594: ...ller 13 Switches SW1 Lower Tray Upper Limit Detects when the lower tray is at its upper limit position 9 SW2 Front Door Safety Cuts the dc power when the front door is opened 6 SW3 Upper Cover Cuts the dc power when the upper cover is opened 1 PCBs PCB1 Main Controls the finisher and communicates with the copier printer 28 ...

Page 595: ...4 4 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Exit Motor 2 Upper Transport Motor 3 Lower Transport Motor 4 Shift Motor 5 Exit Guide Plate Motor 6 Lower Tray Lift Motor 7 Stack Feed out Motor 8 Jogger Motor 9 Stapler Motor B408D105 WMF B408D106 WMF B408D107 WMF 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 596: ...te solenoid C and stapler junction gate solenoid D Upper Tray Mode The tray junction gate solenoid remains off The copies go up to the upper tray Sort Stack Mode The tray junction gate solenoid turns on and the stapler junction gate solenoid remains off The copies are sent to the lower tray directly Staple Mode The tray junction gate solenoid and the stapler junction gate solenoid both turn on The...

Page 597: ...0 Sheet Finisher B408 UPPER TRAY SM 17 B408 4 6 UPPER TRAY When the paper limit sensor A switches on during feed out for each of three consecutive sheets of paper paper overflow is detected B408D109 WMF A ...

Page 598: ... removed the stack height sensor F turns off and the tray lifts up Then the tray stops when the sensor turns on again the tray pushes up the feeler If the stack height sensor fails the lower tray upper limit switch G detects the tray and stops the motor This is a safety measure against stack height sensor failure Sort Stack Mode Tray Down Every five sheets of paper the tray goes down until the sen...

Page 599: ...er transport roller the shift motor turns on driving the shift gear disk and the link D After the paper is delivered to the lower tray E the shift roller moves to its home position which is detected by the shift HP sensor F Then when the trailing edge of the next copy passes the upper transport roller the shift roller shifts again This operation is done every sheet When the trailing edge of each p...

Page 600: ...ioning roller C pushes the copy against the bottom of the stack stopper D For the horizontal paper alignment the jogger front fence E and the rear fence F move to the waiting position which is 18 mm away from the side of the paper When aligning the paper vertically the jogger fence moves in 14 mm from the waiting position After the vertical position has been aligned the jogger fence pushes the pap...

Page 601: ...late A is moved up to make a gap between the exit rollers This operation is done for all paper sizes but is only needed for the larger sizes The exit guide plate motor B and exit roller release cam C control the exit guide plate movement When the exit guide plate motor starts the cam turns and the exit guide plate moves up When stapling is finished the exit guide plate motor turns on again to clos...

Page 602: ... or no staples in the staple cartridge staple end is indicated on the operation panel The stapler sensor C detects this The stapler rotation HP sensor D checks whether the staple hammer mechanism returns to home position after each stack has been stapled When excessive load is applied to the staple hammer motor the copier detects a staple jam When a staple jam has occurred the jammed staple is ins...

Page 603: ...om its home position to the stapling position If two staple position mode is selected the stapler moves to the front stapling position first then moves to the rear stapling position However for the next copy set it staples in the reverse order at the rear side first then at the front side After the job is completed the stapler moves back to its home position The stapler HP sensor B detects this B4...

Page 604: ... to the shift roller The shift roller takes over stack feed out after the leading edge reaches this roller Just before the stapled stack passes through the lower tray exit sensor the stack feed out motor turns off until the shift rollers have completely fed the stack out to the lower tray Then the stack feed out motor turns on again until the pawl B actuates the stack feed out belt home position s...

Page 605: ...TWO TRAY FINISHER B545 ...

Page 606: ......

Page 607: ... 1 13 STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR 9 1 14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR 10 1 14 1 TRAY 1 COVERS 10 tray Shift Sensors and tray release sensor 11 1 14 3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR 11 1 14 4 BACK FENCE LOCK CLUTCH 11 1 15 FINISHER MAIN BOARD 12 1 16 PUNCH HOLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT 12 2 TROUBLESHOOTING 13 2 1 TIMING CHARTS 13 2 1 1 A4 S LT S SHIFT MODE WITH PUNCH TRAY 1 13 2 1 2 A4 S LT S SHIFT MODE WITH PUNCH TRAY 2 14 2 1 ...

Page 608: ... 27 4 5 3 PRE STACK MECHANISM 28 4 6 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM 29 Vertical Paper Alignment 29 Horizontal Paper Alignment 29 4 7 STAPLER MECHANISM 30 4 7 1 STAPLER MOVEMENT 30 Stapler Rotation 30 Side to Side Movement 30 4 7 2 STAPLER 31 4 7 3 FEED OUT AND TRANSPORT 32 4 8 PUNCH UNIT OPTIONAL 33 4 8 1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM 33 4 8 2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION 34 ...

Page 609: ... COVERS 1 1 1 EXTERNAL COVERS 1 Top cover A x4 If the shift tray below is blocking the screw hole remove the shift tray 2 Bracket B x1 3 Front door C 4 Rear cover D x4 1 1 2 INNER COVER 1 Front cover 1 1 1 2 Inner cover A x3 tabs B x3 B352R101 WMF B352R102 WMF A B C D A B B ...

Page 610: ...2 SM 1 2 POSITIONING ROLLER 1 Open the front door 2 Positioning roller A x1 3 Belt B 1 3 TRAY 1 EXIT SENSOR 1 Top cover 1 1 1 2 Open transport door A 3 Bracket B x1 x1 4 Tray 1 exit sensor C B352R103 WMF B352R104 WMF A B A B C ...

Page 611: ...Entrance sensor B x1 3 Stapler tray entrance sensor bracket C x1 x1 4 Stapler tray entrance sensor D 1 5 STAPLER TRAY 1 External covers front door inner cover 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 Two clamps A 3 Harnesses B x8 4 Stapler tray C x2 D x2 E At the front of the finisher pull the stapler tray toward you and lift it out B352R105 WMF B352R107 WMF B352R106 WMF A B C D A B D C E ...

Page 612: ...ear A to release the tray and then support it with your hand as it descends 3 Place one hand under tray 1 the upper tray press in on the gear B to release the tray and then support it with your hand as it descends 4 Tray 1 back fence C x4 5 Sensor stay D x2 x4 6 Plastic bracket E x1 7 Stack height sensors F 8 Metal bracket G x1 9 Upper limit switch H B352R201 WMF B352R109 WMF B352R110 WMF B A C D ...

Page 613: ... GUIDE PLATE MOTOR 1 Tray 1 back fence 1 6 2 Exit guide plate motor A x2 x1 Disengage the shaft of the exit guide plate motor from the ring 1 8 LIFT MOTORS 1 Top cover and rear cover 1 1 1 2 Tray 1 back fence A 1 6 3 Sensor stay B x4 B352R111 WMF B352R203 WMF A A B ...

Page 614: ...LIFT MOTORS B545 6 SM 4 Motor bracket C x3 x 2 5 Tray 1 lift motor D x2 drive belt 6 Tray 2 lift motor E x2 drive belt B352R204 WMF B352R205 WMF C D E ...

Page 615: ...ernal and internal covers 1 1 2 Exit guide plate motor 1 7 3 Guide plate A x1 Pull the shaft toward you through the round hole 4 Guide plate exit assembly B x1 x1 5 Anti static brush C x2 6 Bracket guide exit D x2 7 Lower exit sensor E x1 x1 B352R112 WMF B352R113 WMF B352R114 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 616: ... SENSORS 1 Stapler tray 1 5 2 Sensor bracket A x1 x2 3 Bracket B x1 4 Feeler C 5 Lower stack height sensors D 1 11 TRAY 2 SHUNT POSITION SENSOR 1 Stapler tray 1 5 2 Sensor bracket A x1 x1 3 Tray 2 position shunt sensor B x1 B352R116 WMF B351R202 WMF A B C D A B ...

Page 617: ...apler holder B with one hand as you remove the stapler Do not twist or rotate the stapler bracket as you remove it 1 13 STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR 1 Stapler unit 1 12 2 Carefully rotate the stapler holder A 3 Stapler cover B x1 4 Sensor bracket C x1 x1 5 Stapler rotation HP sensor D B352R117 WMF B352R118 WMF A B B A C D ...

Page 618: ...1 INTERIOR B545 10 SM 1 14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR 1 14 1 TRAY 1 COVERS 1 Tray 1 A x1 2 Rear tray cover B x1 3 Front tray cover C x1 4 Bottom tray cover D x2 5 Bottom bracket E x3 B352R207 WMF B352R208 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 619: ...1 2 Gear disk A x1 3 Tray shift sensors B x1 each 4 Tray release sensor C x1 1 14 3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR 1 Tray 1 covers 1 14 1 2 Motor bracket A x3 x1 3 Tray 1 shift motor B x3 belt x1 1 14 4 BACK FENCE LOCK CLUTCH 1 Tray 1 covers 1 14 1 2 Back fence lock clutch A x1 x1 B352R210 WMF B352R209 WMF B352R211 WMF A C A B B B A ...

Page 620: ...the punch holes in the paper feed direction use the appropriate SP mode To adjust the horizontal position of the holes use the spacers provided with the punch unit 1 Rear cover 1 1 1 2 Punch unit A x3 x5 3 Spacers B The punch position can be adjusted by up to 4 mm using combinations of the 3 spacers provided with the finisher B352R206 WMF B352R119 WMF A B A ...

Page 621: ... Entrance Sensor Upper Exit Sensor Entrance Motor Upper Transport Motor Exit Motor Punch Motor Punch Clutch Punch H P Sensor Tray 1 Shift Motor Tray 1 Shift Sensor Jam Detection 0 1 ON OFF 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 0 1579 3157 467 2046 3624 109 576 1688 2155 3266 3733 1166 1633 2645 3112 4223 4690 500 ms 131 ms 155 ms 1250 ms 34 pulse 700 ms 66 ...

Page 622: ...ransport Motor Exit Motor Punch Motor Punch Clutch Punch H P Sensor Tray 2 Shift Motor Tray 2 Shift Sensor Jam Detection 0 1 ON OFF 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 0 500 ms 155 ms 1250 ms 66 pulse 1353 ms 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 1579 3157 467 2046 3624 109 576 1054 1521 1688 2155 2633 3100 3266 3774 4200 4667 131 ms 34 pulse 700 ms 34 pulse 700 ms ...

Page 623: ...rance Motor ON OFF Stack Feed out H P Sensor OFF 0 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 20000 1579 3157 4736 6314 7893 109 576 1688 2155 3266 3733 4845 5312 6423 6890 8002 8469 1525 1772 3104 3351 4682 4929 7839 8086 9418 9665 6332 11068 11353 12056 87668816 15286 6617 7320 131 ms 155 ms 156 ms 245 pulse 761 ms 1348 2927 4505 186 pulse 459 ms 484 pulse 1194 ms 5304 6039 7662 9241 7765 1892 120 ms 435 pulse...

Page 624: ...does not turn off within 66 pulse after the tray exit sensor turns on Stapler tray entrance sensor On check The stapler tray entrance sensor does not switch on within 102 pulses after the entrance sensor switched off 1 Stapler tray entrance sensor Off check The staple tray entrance sensor does not turn off within 34 pulse after the stapler tray entrance sensor turns on 1 Lower tray exit sensor On ...

Page 625: ...elow To position the shift trays for shipping on the finisher main board set DIP SW4 ON cycle the main machine power off and on then set DIP SW4 OFF The shift trays move automatically to the shipping position After unpacking the machine again and switching on turn all DIP switches off to put the machine into factory default mode 3 2 TEST POINTS No Label Monitored Signal TP101 GND Ground TP102 5V 5...

Page 626: ...e copies A4 S LT S B5 S only in the staple mode the first sheet of the second copy waits here for the next sheet to feed while the previous stack is stapled After the second copy is fed the first and second sheets are fed together to the pre stack tray This delay allows enough time for the previous stack to be stapled without interrupting paper feed Shift trays Tray 1 upper and tray 2 lower shift ...

Page 627: ... 1 shift motor 6 Exit guide plate motor 7 Lower exit roller 8 Tray 2 shift motor 9 Exit motor 10 Lower transport motor 11 Pre stack motor 12 Upper transport motor 13 Punch motor 14 Entrance motor 15 Stack feed out motor 16 Jogger motor 17 Stapler motor 18 Stapler rotation motor B352D104 WMF B352D103 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 ...

Page 628: ...to the upper exit tray 1 is at the upper exit for sort stack mode In sort stack mode for tray 2 both the tray junction gate solenoid A and stapler junction gate solenoid B are off and copies go to the lower exit In staple mode the tray junction solenoid A is off and the stapler junction gate solenoid B is on and copies go to the stapler tray B302D506 WMF B302D505 WMF B302D507 WMF A B A A B ...

Page 629: ... After one print set is delivered to tray 1 the shift motor turns on driving the gear disk and the arm E and the tray drive unit moves to one side Two shift sensors F detect when to stop this side to side movement There is a cut out in the gear disk The shift tray moves in one direction until one of the shift sensors detects the cut out Then the shift tray stops The next set of prints is then deli...

Page 630: ...y 1 However when the tray 2 shift motor B turns on the arm D moves the entire end fence C from side to side not just the tray After the gear disk has turned 180 degrees the cut out in the gear disk enters the tray half turn sensor E and the motor stops When the next set of prints is delivered the motor turns on again and moves the tray back to its previous position B352D105 WMF A B D C E ...

Page 631: ...pper stack height sensor 2 E is actuated the tray 1 lift motor lowers the tray for a specified time When the tray lowers during printing the actuator F will pass through the tray 1 overflow sensor G When the actuator drops below the sensor to deactivate the sensor the machine detects that the paper stack height has exceeded a certain limit The upper limit switch for tray 1 H prevents the drive gea...

Page 632: ...height sensor 1 D is activated When tray 1 is moved down to the lower exit tray 2 must be moved down out of the way So tray 2 E is also lowered until the tray 2 shunt position sensor F detects tray 2 or the top of the paper stack in tray 2 The method of paper height detection is the same as for the upper exit area When the tray lowers during printing the actuator will enter the tray 1 overflow 2 s...

Page 633: ...d position C and is pushing against the plate D in towards the finisher However the plate is fixed so the tray moves out away from the finisher Then the tray 1 shift motor stops then the tray 1 lift motor lowers tray 1 When the tray 1 lower limit sensor is activated as described on the previous page the tray has moved past the sensors at the lower exit The tray 1 shift motor turns on again until t...

Page 634: ...is at the lower position Before tray 1 goes back to the upper exit area the tray lock solenoid F turns off to unlock the tray In addition the back fence lock clutch H turns on to hold the back fence I This prevents the springs inside the back fence from suddenly contracting these springs normally keep the tray steady during side to side shift Then tray 1 is released and it moves up to the upper ex...

Page 635: ...2 overflow sensor 2 F is on see Normal Mode in the above diagram In the multi tray staple mode selected by the service technician the machine detects that the paper stack height has exceeded the overflow limit when the actuator E enters the tray 2 overflow 1 sensor D The lower limit sensor G for tray 2 detects when tray 2 is at its lowest limit and stops the tray 2 lift motor The function of the t...

Page 636: ...vates the entrance sensor This directs the sheet to the pre stack tray B The pre stack feed roller C stops for a specified time after the trailing edge of the paper has passed through the entrance sensor and stops the paper from leaving the pre stack tray At the same time the pre stack junction gate solenoid switches off and the second sheet is sent to the paper guide D The pre stack feed roller c...

Page 637: ...o contact with the paper The positioning roller rotates to push the paper back and align the trailing edge of the paper against the stack stopper D Horizontal Paper Alignment When the start key is pressed the jogger motor E turns on and the jogger fences F move to the waiting position which is 8 mm wider on both sides than the selected paper When the trailing edge of the paper passes the stapler t...

Page 638: ...tor rotates the stapler 45 degrees clockwise at the stapling position before the stapler fires Side to Side Movement The stapler motor D moves the stapler from side to side After the start key is pressed the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position The amount of movement required to reach the stapling position is determined by the size of the selected paper If the two staple m...

Page 639: ...f a stapler cassette is not installed or after the stapler cassette runs out of staples a message is displayed in the operation panel If this condition is detected during a print job the indicator will appear but the print job will not stop The staple position sensor D detects if there is a staple sheet at the stapling position After a new staple cartridge is installed the staple hammer motor turn...

Page 640: ...pled set and feeds it to the tray G The exit guide plate closes at a specified interval after the stapled prints have started to feed out Then the exit roller takes over the stack feed out The stack feed out motor turns off when the pawl actuates the stack feed out belt home position sensor H When tray 1 is passing this area on its way back up to the upper exit the exit guide safety switch I cuts ...

Page 641: ...inisher entrance sensor B the punch motor turns on and the paper stops Then the punch clutch C turns on to make the punch holes The home position is detected by the punch HP sensor D When the cut out in the punch shaft disk E enters the punch HP sensor the punch clutch turns off When the finisher has received the command that changes the number of punch holes the punch hole motor F turns on until ...

Page 642: ...r reaches and actuates the hopper sensor B a message will be displayed on the operation panel after the current job is completed This sensor also detects whether the punch waste hopper is installed When the waste hopper is taken out the arm C moves down and this will actuate the sensor and display a message in the operation panel This message is the same as for the hopper full condition B352D117 W...

Page 643: ...BRIDGE UNIT B538 ...

Page 644: ...ATION 1 1 1 SPECIFICATIONS 1 1 2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 2 1 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 3 1 4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 1 5 DRIVE LAYOUT 4 2 DETAILED DESCRIPTION 5 2 1 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM 5 3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 6 3 1 EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT 6 ...

Page 645: ... Bridge Unit B538 1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION 1 1 SPECIFICATIONS Paper Size Standard sizes A6 lengthwise to A3 HLT to DLT Non standard sizes Width 100 to 305 mm Length 148 to 432 mm Paper Weight 52 g m2 135 g m2 16 lb 42 lb ...

Page 646: ...NT LAYOUT B538 2 SM 1 2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 Upper Exit Roller 2 Junction Gate Solenoid 3 Junction Gate 4 1st Transport Roller 5 Relay Sensor 6 2nd Transport Roller 7 Left Exit Roller A688V500 WMF 2 3 1 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 647: ...ON Symbol Name Function Index No Motors M1 Cooling Fan Cools the transport unit 4 Sensors S1 Tray Exit Checks for misfeeds 3 S2 Relay Checks for misfeeds 7 Switches SW1 Tray Exit Unit Detects when the tray exit unit is opened 5 SW2 Right Guide Detects when the right guide is opened 2 SW3 Left Guide Detects when the left guide is opened 1 Solenoids SOL1 Junction Gate Moves the junction gate to dire...

Page 648: ...DRIVE LAYOUT B538 4 SM 1 5 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Left Exit Roller 2 2nd Transport Roller 3 Upper Exit Roller 4 1st Transport Roller A688V502 WMF 2 3 4 1 ...

Page 649: ...ch is controlled by the junction gate solenoid B When the upper tray is selected the junction gate solenoid turns on and the paper is sent to the upper tray through the upper exit roller C When the left tray or the finisher is selected the junction gate stays off and the paper is sent to the left tray or the finisher through the transport rollers D and the left exit roller A688D500 WMF C B A D ...

Page 650: ...IT SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1 Remove the whole unit from the copier 2 Remove the rear upper cover A 1 screw 3 Remove the upper cover unit B 2 screws 2 connectors 4 Remove the exit guide plate C 2 screws 5 Replace the exit sensor D 1 connector A688R500 WMF A688R501 WMF A B C D ...

Page 651: ...PRINTER OPTION B548 ...

Page 652: ......

Page 653: ... BLUETOOTH G354 04 18 1 10 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS 20 2 TROUBLESHOOTING 21 2 1 CONTROLLER ERRORS 21 3 SERVICE TABLES 22 3 1 SCANNER SERVICE MODE 22 3 1 1 SCANNER PROGRAM MODE TABLE 22 3 2 PRINTER SERVICE MODE 29 3 2 1 SERVICE MODE TABLE 29 3 2 2 SP MODES RELATED TO PRINTER CONTROLLER 29 4 DETAILS 30 4 1 ETHERNET BOARD 30 4 1 1 ETHERNET BOARD LAYOUT 30 4 1 2 ETHERNET BOARD OPERATION 31 4 2 IEEE1394 B...

Page 654: ...leshooting Procedure 41 4 5 BLUETOOTH 42 4 5 1 SPECIFICATIONS 42 4 5 2 BLUETOOTH PROFILES 43 4 5 3 BLUETOOTH SECURITY FEATURES 43 SPECIFICATIONS 44 1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS 44 2 LED INDICATORS 44 3 PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS 45 4 USB SPECIFICATIONS 45 5 IEEE 802 11B SPECIFICATIONS 46 6 SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS 46 7 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES 47 7 1 PRINTER 47 PRINTER DRIVERS 47 UTILITY SOFTWARE 47 7 2 SCANNER 48 S...

Page 655: ...cription Q ty Note 1 Paper Sensor 1 2 Key Tops Printer 2 English 1 set Universal 1 set 3 Key Tops Scanner 2 English 1 set Universal 1 set 4 Paper Limit Sensor Unit 1 5 Tapping Screw M3x8 2 To secure the paper limit sensor unit 6 Pan Head Screw M3x8 1 To secure the paper sensor 7 NIB 1 Option 8 Printer Scanner DIMM 1 9 Ferrite Core 1 For LAN cable ...

Page 656: ...s also require removal of the controller board CAUTION Switch the main machine off and unplug the main machine power cord before starting any procedure described in these instructions 1 2 1 CONTROLLER BOARD AND HDD REMOVAL 1 Remove the controller board A x 2 2 Remove the HDD B x 3 x 2 NOTE Re attach the screw with the washer at C B548I101 WMF B548I103 WMF A B C ...

Page 657: ... Install the printer ROM DIMM A in the inside slot of the controller board 3 Install the NIB packed with the printer scanner option 1 5 If one or more of the following options are to be installed you must remove the HDD and install them before proceeding to the next step Postscript Kit G354 17 128 Memory Card G331 IEEE 1394 Interface G336 USB 2 0 B525 01 IEEE 802 11b Wireless LAN B515 Bluetooth G3...

Page 658: ...ou cannot install the paper limit sensor Go to the next section 1 Peel off the black tape A from the anti static brush B then pull out the cable C 2 Connect the cable to the sensor D NOTE Push the connector into the hole so it is not visible 3 Install the paper limit sensor unit E x 2 B548I901 WMF B548I902 WMF A C B D E ...

Page 659: ...Unit has been installed If the bridge unit is not installed go to the next section 1 Remove the connector cover A and bridge unit B x 2 x 2 2 Open the right cover C of the bridge unit and peel off the black tape D 3 Pull out the connector E 4 Install the paper sensor F x 1 x 1 then reinstall the bridge unit B548I903 WMF B548I904 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 660: ...nner 3 Do not connect the parallel cable now Turn the machine on and check Copier SP mode SP5 907 Plug Play Name 4 Print out the configuration page to confirm correct installation of the printer controller User Tools Printer Settings List Test Print Config Page 5 To connect the parallel cable switch the machine off connect the cable then switch the machine on again 6 Execute SP5801 10 Net File Mem...

Page 661: ...ower cord before starting the following procedure NOTE To install the Postscript 3 option the Printer Option must be installed first 1 2 2 1 Remove the controller board 1 2 1 2 Install the Postscript DIMM A in slot B of the controller board 3 Re install the controller board in the main machine B548I102 WMF A B ...

Page 662: ...in the one available slot only one can be installed 1 Remove the controller board and HDD unit 1 2 1 2 Install the memory DIMM A in the slot B of the controller board Set the edge connector in the slot at a 30 degree angle Push in slightly until you hear it click Push down slowly until it snaps in place NOTE To remove the memory DIMM pull out the plastic arms on either side of the slot to release ...

Page 663: ...IB option the Printer Option must be installed first 1 Remove the controller board and HDD unit 1 2 1 2 Remove the NIB slot cover A Save this screw 3 Attach the NIB B to the slot C on the controller board x 2 NOTE Use the screw removed from the NIB slot cover and one provided screw 4 Re install the HDD and re install the controller board B548I106 WMF A B C ...

Page 664: ... available for the interface option You can install only one printer interface option at a time IEEE 1394 USB 2 0 IEEE 802 11b or Bluetooth 1 Remove the controller board and HDD unit 1 2 1 2 Remove the cover A x 2 Save these screws 3 Attach the USB 2 0 board B to the controller board C x 2 Use the screws you removed in Step 2 4 Make sure that the jumper D is set on TB2 5 Re install the HDD and re ...

Page 665: ...print SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394 The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 1394 SP No Name Function 5839 004 Device Name Sets the names for all the physical devices connected to the IEEE 1394 firewire network 5839 007 Cycle Master Enables or disables cycle master function of the IEEE 1394 standard bus 5839 008 BCR Mode Sets the BCR Broadcast Channel Register setting for the Auto Node opera...

Page 666: ...printer interface option at a time IEEE 1394 USB 2 0 IEEE 802 11b or Bluetooth 1 Remove the controller board and HDD unit 1 2 1 2 Remove the cover A x 2 Save these screws 3 Attach the IEEE 1394 board B to the controller board C x 2 Use the screws you removed in Step 2 4 Re install the HDD and re install the controller board 5 Execute SP5990 5 to print a Self Diagnostic Report with the system setti...

Page 667: ...s marked DFU These settings are for design and factory use only SP No Name Function Adjusts the USB transfer rate Do not change the setting unless there is a data transfer error using the USB high speed mode HS FS High speed Full speed auto adjust 480Mbps 12Mbps 5844 001 Transfer Rate FS Full speed 12Mbps fixed 5844 002 Vendor ID Displays the vendor ID DFU 5844 003 Product ID Displays the product ...

Page 668: ...nly one slot is available for the interface option You can install only one printer interface option at a time IEEE 1394 USB 2 0 or IEEE 802 11b 1 Remove the controller board and HDD unit 1 2 1 2 Remove the slot cover x 2 Save these screws 3 Attach the IEEE 801 11b board A to the controller board B x 2 Use the screws you removed in Step 2 4 Set the jumper C between pins 3 and 4 5 Re install the HD...

Page 669: ... at least 40 60 mm 1 5 2 5 Always detach the antennas from the corners of the machine and disconnect them before moving the machine 9 Connect the antennas to the terminals D 10 Coil the cables E and hang them over the antennas as shown 11 Attach the cover F x2 12 If reception is poor you may need to move the machine Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of equipme...

Page 670: ...de Select either Ad Hoc Mode or Infrastructure Mode 7 SSID Setting Enter the SSID setting The setting is case sensitive 8 Channel This setting is required when Ad Hoc Mode is selected Range 1 14 default 11 NOTE The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different countries 9 WEP Privacy Setting The WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy setting is designed to protect wireless data transmission ...

Page 671: ... Mbps 270 m 295 yd 1 Mbps 400 m 437 yd 12 To initialize the wireless LAN settings use page 2 2 Press Execute to initialize the following settings Transmission mode Channel Transmission Speed WEP SSID WEP Key SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802 11b Wireless LAN The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 802 11b SP No Name Function 5840 004 SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting 5840 006 Channel...

Page 672: ...ilable for the interface option You can install only one printer interface option at a time IEEE 1394 USB 2 0 or IEEE 802 11b or Bluetooth 1 Remove the controller board and HDD unit 1 2 1 2 Remove the slot cover x 2 Save these screws 3 Attach the Bluetooth board A to the controller board B x 2 Use the screws you removed in Step 2 4 Set the jumper C between pins 3 and 4 5 Re install the HDD and re ...

Page 673: ...BLUETOOTH G354 04 SM 19 B548 Printer Option B548 6 Insert the Bluetooth card A into the slot 7 Press the antenna B to extend it 8 Attach the antenna cap C B548I111 WMF A B C ...

Page 674: ... and turn on the main switch 2 Enter the printer user mode and print the configuration page User Tools Printer Settings List Test Print Config Page NOTE The same data can also be printed by executing SP1 004 Print Summary All installed options are listed in the System Reference column ...

Page 675: ...er Option B548 2 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 1 CONTROLLER ERRORS Refer to section 4 1 of the main unit service manual for descriptions on SC code information because the GW architecture includes controller SC codes in the main unit SC code table ...

Page 676: ...er Function and Setting 1 Model Name Displays the model name 2 Scanner Firmware Version Displays the scanner firmware version 3 Scanner Firmware Number Displays the firmware s part number 1001 4 Detail Model Name Displays the detail model name 1002 Error Log Display Displays the error log data 1004 Compression Type Selects the compression type for binary picture processing 1 MH 2 MR 3 MMR 1005 Era...

Page 677: ...ocessing mode 0 11 4 1 step 7 Brightness Notch 7 Adjusts the image density for each image density level for Text mode when using binary picture processing mode 0 255 128 1 step 8 Contrast Notch 7 0 255 128 1 step 9 Threshold Level Notch 7 0 255 128 1 step 10 Brightness Notch 6 0 255 128 1 step 11 Contrast Notch 6 0 255 128 1 step 12 Threshold Level Notch 6 0 255 128 1 step 13 Brightness Notch 5 0 ...

Page 678: ...n the main scan direction for Text OCR mode Select a higher number for a stronger filter 0 7 0 1 step 4 MTF Filter Strength Sub scan As above for sub scan 0 7 4 1 step 5 Smoothing Filter Selects the smoothing pattern for Text OCR mode when using binary picture processing mode A larger value could cause moiré to appear in the image 0 7 0 1 step 6 Scanner Gamma Selects the scanner gamma type for Tex...

Page 679: ...is is 1 the edges of characters in scanned images will be smoothed 0 OFF 1 ON 2004 Text Photo Mode Settings 1 MTF Filter Coefficient Main Scan Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main scan direction for Text Photo mode Select a higher number for a stronger filter If this is 0 the MTF filter is not applied 0 13 2 1 step 2 MTF Filter Coefficient Sub Scan As above for sub scan 0 13 2 1 step 3 M...

Page 680: ...Settings 1 MTF Filter Coefficient Main Scan Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main scan direction for Photo mode Select a higher number for a stronger filter If this is 0 the MTF filter is not applied 0 13 0 1 step 2 MTF Filter Coefficient Sub Scan As above for sub scan 0 13 0 1 step 3 MTF Filter Strength Main Scan Selects the MTF filter strength in the main scan direction for Photo mode S...

Page 681: ...4 Contrast Notch 2 0 255 128 1 step 25 Threshold Level Notch 2 0 255 128 1 step 26 Brightness Notch 1 0 255 128 1 step 27 Contrast Notch 1 0 255 128 1 step 28 Threshold Level Notch 1 0 255 128 1 step 2006 Grayscale Mode Settings 1 MTF Filter Coefficient Selects the MTF filter coefficient in the main scan direction when using grayscale processing mode Select a higher number for a stronger filter If...

Page 682: ... 4 0 255 128 1 step 17 Contrast Notch 4 0 255 128 1 step 18 Threshold Level Notch 4 Not available 0 255 128 1 step 19 Brightness Notch 3 0 255 138 1 step 20 Contrast Notch 3 0 255 138 1 step 21 Threshold Level Notch 3 Not available 0 255 138 1 step 22 Brightness Notch 2 0 255 148 1 step 23 Contrast Notch 2 0 255 148 1 step 24 Threshold Level Notch 2 Not available 0 255 148 1 step 25 Brightness Not...

Page 683: ...ller firmware 3 2 2 SP MODES RELATED TO PRINTER CONTROLLER The following SP modes are located in the copier SP mode Refer to section 5 1 of the main unit service manual SP No Description Function and Setting 5104 A3 DLT Double Count Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3 DLT 0 No 1 Yes If is selected the total counter and the current user code counter count up twice when A3 or DLT paper i...

Page 684: ...unctions of each device in the network EEPROM Stores the MAC address The physical layer device the lowest layer of the OSI reference model refers to the physical components of the network cables connectors and so on OSI the Operating Standard Interface is a framework upon which networking standards are arranged It is commonly diagramed as a layered cake Connector GW PHY Bus I f EEPROM LED LED PHY ...

Page 685: ...tandard IEEE802 3u type which implements 10 100Mbps auto negotiation System initialization sets the network for 10Mbps 100Mbps Indicates the link status ON Link Safe LED 1 Green OFF Link Fail Indicates the operation mode ON 100 Mbps mode LED 2 Orange OFF 10 Mbps mode LED 2 LED 1 B548D003 WMF ...

Page 686: ...e connected without a host Devices in a computer can be connected to external devices on a shared bus IEEE1394 supports two printing methods 1 SCSI Print and 2 IP Over 1394 IP Over 1394 supports printing by setting an IP address and SCSI supports printing without an IP address NOTE 1 Windows Me and Windows XP support IP over 1394 2 Windows XP and 2000 support IEEE1394 SCSI printing Software Applic...

Page 687: ... comprise the 16 bit Node ID 64 000 nodes are allowed on each system Up to 16 hops are allowed 4 5 m hop for a total of 72 meters devices are daisy chained Firewire allows its devices to draw power from the Firewire connection Two power connectors in the cable can supply power 8 to 40 V 1 5 amp max An important element of Firewire is its support of isochronous devices When isochronous devices are ...

Page 688: ...river is available If the driver is not available a message prompts the user for the driver disk for immediate installation Hot swapping cables can be connected and disconnected while the computer and other devices are switched on No terminator or device ID required Data rates of 12 Mbps full speed and 1 5 Mbps low speed Common connectors for different devices Bi directional data communication bet...

Page 689: ...or upstream connection to the host system and type B connectors for downstream connection to the USB device 4 3 4 PIN ASSIGNMENT The controller has a type B receptacle CN10 Pin No Signal Description Wiring Assignment 1 Power Red 2 Data White 3 Data Green 4 Power GND White B548D905 WMF B548D904 WMF Controller Board SIMAC Parallel I F IC Card I F NVRAM CN5 SLOT1 CN4 CPU CN1 CN2 USB I F Ethernet I F ...

Page 690: ...nt up to the page where the print job was cancelled When the controller board is replaced the host computer will recognize the machine as a different device Related SP Mode USB Settings in the printer engine service mode Data rates can be adjusted to full speed fixed 12 Mbps This switch may be used for troubleshooting if there is a data transfer error using the high speed mode 480Mbps Data rates c...

Page 691: ...grated into existing wired networks Once installed the network treats wireless nodes like any other physically wired network component Flexibility and mobility make wireless LANs both effective extensions of and attractive alternatives to wired networks Standard applied IEEE802 11b Data transmission rates Speed Distance 11 Mbps 140 m 153 yd 5 5 Mbps 200 m 219 yd 2 Mbps 270 m 295 yd 1 Mbps 400 m 43...

Page 692: ... up the machine in ad hoc mode and program the necessary settings even if the machine will be used in the infrastructure mode To switch between ad hoc and infrastructure modes use the following user tool Host Interface Menu IEEE802 11b Comm Mode Infrastructure Mode The infrastructure mode allows communication between each computer and the printer via an access point equipped with an antenna and wi...

Page 693: ...sometimes called Network Name Some devices automatically change from ad hoc mode to infrastructure mode when the same SSID is used in ad hoc mode and infrastructure mode In such a case to use the device in ad hoc mode use a specified SSID in infrastructure mode and use ASSID in the ad hoc mode WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a coding system designed to protect wireless data transmission In ord...

Page 694: ...76 100 Fair 41 75 Poor 21 40 Unavailable 0 20 NOTE Communication status can be measured only when the infrastructure mode is being used Channel Settings If a communication error occurs because of electrical noise interference with other electrical devices etc you may have to change the channel settings To avoid interference with neighboring channels it is recommended to change by 3 channels For ex...

Page 695: ...Host Interface menu Network Setup LAN Type 3 Check if the channel settings are correct 4 Check if the SSID and WEP are correctly set If infrastructure mode is being used 1 Check if the MAC address is properly set 2 Check the communication status If the communication status is poor bring the machine closer to the access point or check for any obstructions between the machine and the access point If...

Page 696: ...the ad hoc mode This network is called a Piconet A Piconet may contain a maximum of 8 Bluetooth devices There is one master device and seven slave devices in a Piconet The master device controls the hopping frequency and timing as well as storing the ID codes of the slave devices The master and slave devices can be swapped Once the master device leaves the Piconet a slave device becomes the new ma...

Page 697: ... Object Exchange Profile Object Push Profile File Transfer Profile Synchronization Profile Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile Serial Port Profile SPP and Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile HCRP are used for the printer products SPP is used is place of the serial port while HCRP is used in place of the parallel port 4 5 3 BLUETOOTH SECURITY FEATURES Public and Private Mode The PC can browse Bluetoo...

Page 698: ...17 7 Printer Scanner Module ROM DIMM B548 Provided with NIB 8 NIB B525 03 NOTE Of the optional host interface cards 2 3 4 and 5 only one can be installed 2 LED INDICATORS LED Description On Off LED1 Green Link status Link success Link failure LED2 Orange Power distribution Power on Power off Controller Board MARIMBA Parallel I F IC Card I F NVRAM CN517 CN508 SLOT1 CN509 SLOT2 CN503 CPU CN501 Print...

Page 699: ...ts PS3 136 fonts 24 Type 2 fonts 112 Type 14 fonts Host Interfaces Bi directional IEEE1284 parallel x 1 Standard Ethernet 100 Base TX 10 Base T Option IEEE1394 with SCSI Print and IP Over 1394 Option IEEE 802 11b Wireless LAN Option Bluetooth Option USB 2 0 Option Network Protocols TCP IP IPX SPX NetBEUI Apple Talk Memory Maximum 192 MB Standard 64 MB 128 MB optional DIMM 4 USB SPECIFICATIONS USB ...

Page 700: ...Available scanning Resolution Range 100 1200 dpi When used as a Network TWAIN scanner 100 200 300 400 600 dpi When used as a network delivery scanner or for sending e mail Grayscales 8 bits pixel Scanning Speed Throughput 0 8 sec sheet A4 LEF 200 dpi without binary compression 49 spm A4 LEF 200 dpi binary MH Interface Ethernet 100 Base TX 10 Base T for TCP IP IEEE 1394 IP Over IEEE 802 11b Wireles...

Page 701: ...tion Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000 Win 95 98 ME NT4 2000 A font management utility with screen fonts for the printer SmartNetMonitor for Admin Win 95 98 ME NT4 2000 XP A printer management utility for network administrators NIB setup utilities are also available SmartNetMonitor for Client Win 95 98 ME NT4 2000 XP A printer management utility for client users Peer to peer printing utility and par...

Page 702: ... driver and utility software are provided on one CD ROM SCANNER DRIVER Network Twain Driver for Win95 98 ME NT3 51 NT4 0 2000 XP SCANNER UTILITIES Scan Router V2 Lite for Win95 98 ME NT4 0 2000 XP Desk Top Binder V2 Lite for Win95 98 ME NT4 0 2000 XP ...

Page 703: ...FAX OPTION B547 ...

Page 704: ......

Page 705: ...K LAYER 27 2 2 7 TRANSPORT LAYER 27 2 2 8 SESSION LAYER 28 2 2 9 DOCUMENT LAYER 29 2 2 10 PRESENTATION LAYER 29 2 3 FAX SC CODES 30 2 3 1 OVERVIEW 30 2 3 2 SC1201 30 2 3 3 SC1207 30 2 3 4 FAX SC CODE TABLE 31 2 4 ISDN TEST FUNCTION 32 2 4 1 LEDS 32 2 4 2 BACK TO BACK TEST 33 3 SERVICE TABLES 34 3 1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 34 3 1 1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION 34 Entering and Exiting SP mode 34 SP2 ...

Page 706: ... 118 4 1 OVERVIEW 118 4 2 BOARDS 119 4 2 1 FCU 119 4 2 2 NCU US 121 4 2 3 NCU EUROPE ASIA 122 4 2 4 SG3 BOARD 123 4 2 5 SIG4 BOARD 124 4 3 VIDEO DATA PATH 125 4 3 1 TRANSMISSION 125 4 3 2 RECEPTION 128 4 4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES 130 4 4 1 PERSONAL INFORMATION TRANSFER BOXES 130 4 4 2 MULTI PORT 133 4 4 3 DOCUMENT SERVER 134 4 4 4 LAN FAX DRIVER 135 4 1 ADDRESS BOOK 137 4 1 1 ADDRESS BOOK BACKU...

Page 707: ...entions in this Manual This manual uses several symbols Symbol What it means Refer to section number See Core Tech Manual for details Screw Connector E ring Clip ring Long Edge Feed LEF Short Edge Feed SEF ...

Page 708: ......

Page 709: ...an electrical storm There may be remote risk of electric shock from lightning 6 Do not use a telephone or cellular phone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak CAUTION 1 Before installing the fax unit switch off the main switch and disconnect the power cord 2 The fax unit contains a lithium battery The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced Replace o...

Page 710: ...ling the G3 Interface Unit CH2 Install the CCUIF board and option G3 board to the FCU board Downside connector on the CCUIF board Attach the option NCU board to the NCU unit Downside of the NCU unit Install the CCUIF board and optin G3 board to the FCU board Upside connector on the CCUIF board Attach the option NCU board to the NCU unit Upside of the NCU unit Yes Insert the FCU baord to the machin...

Page 711: ...chine print out all data in the printer buffer 2 Press the operation switch to be the standby mode Make sure the power LED is not lit then turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the network cable 1 Remove the small cover A x 1 and connector B 2 Remove the rear upper cover C x 2 3 Remove the rear lower cover D x 4 B547I903 WMF B547I926 WMF A B C D ...

Page 712: ...tches B and C on the NCU NOTE European Asian models only non U S version B547 27 Region Country TB1 B TB2 C Hong Kong OFF OFF Hungary ON ON Poland ON OFF Czech Republic ON OFF Israel ON ON South Africa ON ON Regions countries where the CTR21 standard is valid ON ON Other ON OFF TB1 ON Keep the jumper attached OFF Remove the jumper TB2 ON Keep the jumper at ON OFF Move the jumper to OFF NOTE You mu...

Page 713: ...FAX OPTION TYPE 2045 SM 5 B547 Fax Option B547 6 Remove the controller unit A x 2 7 Remove the FCU cover B x 2 B547I904 WMF B A ...

Page 714: ...sion box If any following options are to be installed at the same time connect the option board to the FCU board before sliding the FCU board into the expansion box Refer to the Installation Procedure of each option Fax Function Upgrade Option Type 185 unit G3 Interface Unit Type 2045 11 Attach the edge clamp D to the bottom of the expansion box then clamp the FCU harness E B547I105 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 715: ... and connect the FCU harness B to the NCU board Then clamp the harness as shown 13 Reattach the FCU cover and the controller unit 14 Remove parts C and D then install parts E F and G Affix the super G3 decal H on the front cover as shown B547I906 WMF B547I905 WMF C D E F G H A B ...

Page 716: ...artridge C 19 Connect the telephone line to the LINE jack at the rear of the machine NOTE The copier must be connected to a properly grounded socket outlet 20 Plug in the machine and turn on the main power switch 21 Be sure to set the clock date and time 22 Enter service mode and program the serial number into the fax unit SP 3 102 000 The serial number can be found on the serial number label atta...

Page 717: ...U cover B x 2 4 Remove the FCU harness C and slide out the FCU board D 5 Attach the four standoffs F to the CCUIF board E 6 Attach the CCUIF board to the FCU board G 7 Attach the flat cable H to the FCU board and the CCUIF board 8 Attach the option G3 board I to the lower connector of the CCUIF board x 2 B547I911 WMF B547I909 WMF B547I912 WMF D C E F G H I B A ...

Page 718: ... INTERFACE UNIT TYPE 2045 B547 10 SM Fax Option B547 9 Remove the NCU unit A x 2 10 Attach the Option NCU unit B to the lower of the reverse side of the NCU unit x 2 as shown B547I913 WMF B547I914 WMF A B ...

Page 719: ...s countries where the CTR21 standard is valid ON ON Other ON OFF TB1 ON Keep the jumper attached OFF Remove the jumper TB2 ON Keep the jumper at ON OFF Move the jumper to OFF NOTE You must change the country code in both system switch 0F and NCU parameter CC service function 08 0 12 Attach the telephone jack C to the bracket D 13 Run through the harness through the lower hole E in the NCU bracket ...

Page 720: ... the option NCU board 15 Attach the harness clamps B x2 then clamp the harness 16 Attach the NCU unit C to the machine x 2 and slide the FCU board into the machine 17 Run harness D through the holes 18 Attach the ferrite core E to the harness B547I915 WMF B547I916 WMF A B B C D E ...

Page 721: ...Connect the telephone line to the LINE2 jack then plug in the machine and turn the main switch on NOTE The copier must be connected to a properly grounded socket outlet 23 Enter service mode Set bit 1 of communication switch 16 to 1 for the first option G3 unit Set bit 3 of communication switch 16 to 1 for the second option G3 unit After that turn the main switch off and on 24 Print the system par...

Page 722: ...e lists of user programmed items and the system parameter list 2 If there is a printer option in the machine print out all data in the printer buffer 3 Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord the telephone line and the STP cable 1 Remove the controller unit A x 2 2 Remove the FCU cover B x 2 3 Remove the FCU harness and slide out the FCU board C B547I200 WMF A B C Rev 09 2003 ...

Page 723: ...this time the following message appears SC1207 Adding FAX Feature Expander causes data loss Turn main power switch off remove it to avoid loss To continue press Yes 10 Press Yes to initialize the SRAM NOTE Whenever installing the FAX FUNCTION UPGRADE board at the first time the machine displays SC1207 Ignore this SC code This is not a problem 11 Enter the service mode and set bit 7 of system switc...

Page 724: ... paper or has a jammed printer The other party pressed Stop during communication 0 03 Incompatible modem at the other end The other terminal is incompatible 0 04 CFR or FTT not received after modem training Check the line connection Check the NCU FCU connectors Try changing the tx level and or cable equalizer settings Replace the FCU or NCU The other terminal may be faulty try sending to another m...

Page 725: ...her end may be defective try sending to another machine 0 08 The other end sent RTN or PIN after receiving a page because there were too many errors Check the line connection Check the FCU NCU connectors Replace the NCU or FCU The other end may have jammed or run out of paper or memory space Try adjusting the tx level and or cable equalizer settings The other end may have a defective modem NCU FCU...

Page 726: ...ng Check the line connection Check the FCU NCU connectors Replace the NCU or FCU Check for line problems Try calling another fax machine Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first line and or rx cable equalizer setting Cross reference Reconstruction time G3 Switch 0A bit 6 Rx cable equalizer G3 Switch 07 PSTN 0 21 EOL signal end of line from the other end not received within 5 s of the pr...

Page 727: ... during communication Check the line connection Retry communication 0 70 The communication mode specified in CM JM was not available V 8 calling and called terminal The other terminal did not have a compatible communication mode e g the other terminal was a V 34 data modem and not a fax modem A polling tx file was not ready at the other terminal when polling rx was initiated from the calling termi...

Page 728: ...ting If these errors happen at the receiving terminal Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting Try increasing the tx level Try using V 17 or a slower modem if the same error is frequent when receiving from multiple senders 0 84 The line was disconnected due to abnormal signaling in V 34 phase 4 control channel start up The signal did not stop within 10 s Turn off the machine then turn it back ...

Page 729: ...f a fatal communication error If this is frequent update the ROM or replace the FCU 3 00 G4 interface board reset Replace the G4 interface board or FCU 3 10 Disconnection during ISDN G3 communication Check the other terminal and the ISDN line The other terminal may have dialed a wrong number 3 11 Disconnection during ISDN G4 communication Check the other terminal and the ISDN line 3 20 A CSA signa...

Page 730: ... 5 25 SAF file access error Replace the FCU or EXMEM board 6 00 G3 ECM T1 time out during reception of facsimile data 6 01 G3 ECM no V 21 signal was received 6 02 G3 ECM EOR was received Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer Replace the FCU or NCU 6 04 G3 ECM RTC not detected Check the line connection Check connections from the NCU to the FCU Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal Replac...

Page 731: ...ed for scanning Lower the scan resolution if possible Add optional page memory 22 01 Memory overflow while receiving Wait for the files in the queue to be sent Delete unnecessary files from memory Transfer the substitute reception files to an another fax machine if the machine s printer is busy or out of order Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk 22 02 Tx or rx job stalled due to line disc...

Page 732: ...m Do the following Check the error bit rate of the network If it is high contact the network and ask them to improve the line Check the network speed is it 56 or 64 kbps and make sure that the bit switch setting is correct You may also use the dedicated transmission parameters if this problem only occurs when dialing certain numbers Check that the user dialed the correct number 5 There is a networ...

Page 733: ...machine received an unsolicited DM F 1 2 7 22 At TEI release the machine received an unsolicited UA F 1 2 7 23 At the start of link set up the machine received an unsolicited DM F 0 2 7 24 At TEI release the machine received an unsolicited UA F 0 2 7 25 SABME received at the start of network link set up No error 7 26 N200 retransmission error for SABME 2 7 27 N200 retransmission error for DISC 2 7...

Page 734: ...INK LAYER Code Probable Cause Action 7 60 T3 timeout timeout while waiting for flag 4 7 61 T3 timeout timeout while waiting for SABM during an incoming call 4 7 62 T1 timeout x N2 timeout while waiting for UA after sending SABM 5 7 63 T1 timeout x N2 timeout while waiting for a response to a transmitted S frame P 1 5 7 64 T1 timeout x N2 timeout while waiting for SABM or DISC after sending FRMR 5 ...

Page 735: ...meout while waiting for an RF packet 6 7 95 T23 timeout timeout while waiting for a CF packet 6 7 96 T10 timeout timeout while waiting for the first frame 6 2 2 7 TRANSPORT LAYER Code Probable Cause Action 8 00 Invalid block received 8 8 01 TCC block received 8 8 02 TBR block received 8 8 05 TCR block block format error 8 8 06 TCR block block size parameter LI error 8 8 07 TCR block extended addre...

Page 736: ...44 Service identification error in RSSP 8 8 45 Session user data error in RSSP 8 8 47 Message synchronization error inside the CCU 8 8 48 Document task busy 8 8 50 Ti timeout non communication surveillance timer T 62 8 8 51 T2 timeout timeout while waiting for a response T 62 8 8 52 T3 timeout CSA timer timeout T 62 8 8 53 G4 board load timer timeout calling side waited too long for a new session ...

Page 737: ...qual to 0 8 8 76 Internal error 8 2 2 10 PRESENTATION LAYER Code Probable Cause Action 8 80 X 209 coding error in session user data LI error 8 8 81 PV error in session user data 8 8 82 PI error in session user data 8 8 83 The capabilities in the session user data of CDS CDC were not the same as those in RDCLP 8 8 84 X 209 coding error in the DP LI error 8 8 85 X 209 coding error in the SLD documen...

Page 738: ... on 2 3 2 SC1201 When the FCU detects an unrecoverable error in the SRAM which requires a complete SRAM initialization the fax unit displays this SC Code and stops There is no way to recover from this error condition without a complete SRAM initialization all the user and service programmed data will be erased The possible causes are SRAM backup battery defect or SW1 on the FCU is at the OFF posit...

Page 739: ...er 1112 Base copier s engine was reset 1120 Interface module error Initialize the fax unit See section 2 3 1 for the initialization procedure Automatic reset 1201 Unrecoverable FCU SRAM error Refer to section 2 3 2 Service Call display 1207 Unrecoverable Fax Function Upgrade SRAM error Refer to section 2 3 3 Service Call display 1299 1305 1310 1311 1312 1401 1405 1601 Software error Initialize the...

Page 740: ...e the status of the machine LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 Initial Settings O ON OFF Initial check if the flash ROM is updated O O O O Handshaking with the FCU ready O O Standby Mode Ready to communicate Communication Layer 1 activated O Link setup O O B channel 1 connected O O O B channel 2 connected O O O ...

Page 741: ...board set bits 0 and 1 of G4 parameter switch 0D to 1 In the machine acting in TE mode SiG4 board set bit 0 of G4 parameter switch 0D to 0 and bit 1 to 1 4 Reset the machines by switching them off waiting a few seconds then switching back on 5 Place a document in one of the machines dial a number then press Start 6 After you have finished the test set bits 0 and 1 of G4 parameter switch 0D back to...

Page 742: ...cover or ARDF is open while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or writing data 3 1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 3 1 1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION The service program SP mode is used to check electrical data change modes and adjust values Entering and Exiting SP mode 1 Press the Clear Mode key 2 U...

Page 743: ...1 Switch 105 001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of the standard G3 board Section 3 2 Bit Switches G3 2 Switch 106 001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of the optional G3 board Section 3 2 Bit Switches G3 3 Switch 107 001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of the optional G3 board Section 3 2 Bit Switches G4 Internal S...

Page 744: ...he optional G3 board Section 3 3 NCU Parameters SP3 XXX Tel Line Settings 3 Mode No Function Service Station 001 Fax Number Enter the fax number of the service station 101 002 Select Line Select the line type Serial Number 102 000 Enter the fax unit s serial number PSTN 1 Port Settings 001 Select Line Select the line type setting for the G3 1 line If the machine is installed on a PABX line select ...

Page 745: ...d any fax messages on the G3 3 line 106 ISDN Port Settings 001 Select Line Select the line setting for the ISDN line If the machine is installed to the PABX line select PABX Japan Only 002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for ISDN line Japan Only 003 Memory Lock Disabled If the customer does not want to receive transmissions using Memory Lock on this line change this SP to on Japan ...

Page 746: ...l Dump List 001 G3 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for all G3 lines 002 G3 1 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the G3 1 line 003 G3 1 1 Communication Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication for the G3 1 line 004 G3 2 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the G3 2 lin...

Page 747: ...ed using the memory lock feature 106 Journal Print out 001 All Journals The machine prints all the communication records on the report 002 Specified Date The machine prints all communication records after the specified date 107 Log List Print out 001 All log files 002 APIP 003 Mail Box 004 Operation 005 Printer APIP 006 SC TRAP Stored 007 Scanner 008 JOB SAF 009 Decompression 010 Reconstruction 01...

Page 748: ... G3 2 V34 S2800baud 114 G3 2 V34 S3000baud 115 G3 2 V34 S3200baud 116 G3 2 V34 S3429baud 117 G3 3 Modem Tests 118 G3 3 DTMF Tests 119 G3 3 V34 S2400baud 120 G3 3 V34 S2800baud 121 G3 3 V34 S3000baud 122 G3 3 V34 S3200baud 123 G3 3 V34 S3429baud 124 IG3 1 Modem Tests 125 IG3 1 DTMF Tests 126 IG3 1 V34 S2400baud 127 IG3 1 V34 S2800baud 128 IG3 1 V34 S3000baud 129 IG3 1 V34 S3200baud 130 IG3 1 V34 S3...

Page 749: ...bit to 0 after programming dedicated transmission parameters 1 Not used Do not change the setting Technical data printout on the Journal 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 Instead of the personal name the following data are listed on the Journal for each G3 communication 2 e g 0000 32V34 288 264 L0100 03 04 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 EQM value Line quality data A larger number means more errors 2 Symbol rate V 34 only...

Page 750: ...s the CSI display for the user Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing 6 Protocol dump list output after each communication 0 Off 1 On This is only used for communication troubleshooting It shows the content of the transmitted facsimile protocol signals Always reset this bit to 0 after finishing testing If system switch 09 bit 6 is at 1 the list is only printed if there was an error during th...

Page 751: ...All RDS systems are always locked out 0 1 1 0 Normally RDS systems are locked out but the user can temporarily switch RDS on to allow RDS operations to take place RDS will automatically be locked out again after a certain time which is stored in System Switch 03 Note that if an RDS operation takes place RDS will not switch off until this time limit has expired 1 1 At any time an RDS system can acc...

Page 752: ...C message tx rx of the T 30 protocol are listed on the Journal 1 Communications that reached phase A call setup of T 30 protocol are listed on the Journal This will include telephone calls 2 Automatic error report printout 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Error reports will not be printed 1 Error reports will be printed automatically after failed communications 3 Printing of the error code on the error repo...

Page 753: ...k dial is disabled 6 Not used Do not change the setting 7 Line used when the machine falls back to G3 from G4 if the other end is not a G4 machine 0 PSTN 1 ISDN Japan Only This bit switch has no effect if Communication Switch 07 bit 0 is set to 0 System Switch 0B Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch 0C Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch 0D Not used Do no...

Page 754: ...rameter C C System Switch 10 Not used Do not change the factory settings System Switch 11 SP No 1 101 018 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 TTI printing position 0 Superimposed on the page data 1 Printed before the data leading edge Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints information that the customer considers to be important G3 transmissions 1 TSI G3 or CIL TID G4 printing position 0 Superimposed on the...

Page 755: ... 2 7 Not used Do not change the settings System Switch 16 Not used do not change the settings System Switch 17 Not used do not change the settings System Switch 18 Not used do not change the settings System Switch 19 SP No 1 101 026 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 2 Not used Do not change the settings 3 Selects a temporary address for the number PC FAX 0 When prefixed by handled only as a stored address 1 ...

Page 756: ...tic Journal printout is enabled but the machine cannot print the report e g no paper 0 If the buffer memory of the communication records for the Journal has become full fax communications will become impossible to prevent overwriting the communication records before the machine prints them out 1 If the buffer memory of the communication records for the Journal is full fax communications are still ...

Page 757: ... change the settings 7 RAM initialization after the optional Function Upgrade unit is installed or removed 0 Enabled 1 Disabled When the machine detects that a Function Upgrade unit has been installed or removed the machine shows the following message on the display for the customer Adding Removing FAX Feature Expander causes data loss Turn Main Power Switch off and remove replace it to avoid loss...

Page 758: ...3 Received fax print start timing G3 reception 0 After receiving each page 1 After receiving all pages 4 Received fax print start timing G4 reception 0 After receiving each page 1 After receiving all pages 0 The machine prints each page immediately after the machine receives it 1 The machine prints the complete message after the machine receives all the pages in the memory 5 6 Not used Do not chan...

Page 759: ... 02 SP No 3 201 003 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 7 Binary picture processing Threshold for Text mode Normal setting center position This setting determines the threshold value for binary picture processing in Text mode when the scan density setting is at the center The value can be between 01 and FF For a darker threshold input a lower value Default setting 71 H 113 D FAX Switch 03 Not used do not ch...

Page 760: ...tween 0 Off and F For a weaker threshold input a lower value Default setting 7 This setting is independent from the threshold specified by the copier SP modes 4 to 7 MTF filter level Text Photo mode The value can be between 0 Off and F For a weaker threshold input a lower value Default setting 7 This setting is independent from the threshold specified by the copier SP modes FAX Switch 07 SP No 3 2...

Page 761: ... For a weaker threshold input a lower value larger dots are erased Default setting 7 This setting is independent from the threshold setting specified by the copier SP modes FAX Switch 0B SP No 3 201 012 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 3 Scan margin setting right and left margin in book scan ADF mode The setting can be between 0 and F H unit 0 5 mm Default setting 2 mm 4 to 7 Scan margin setting top and ...

Page 762: ... user to put the jammed page back into the original stack and continues scanning The message is displayed for the time period specified by scanner switch 0E bit 2 1 The machine erases all the scanned pages and asks the user to retry from the first page 1 to 2 Setting when an original size cannot be recognized Bit 2 1 Setting 0 0 No original 0 1 A5 1 0 A5 1 1 No original 3 7 Not used Do not change ...

Page 763: ...ays 0 Disabled 1 Enabled This bit determines whether the machine rotates the scanned image by 90 degrees before transmission If this bit is set at 1 A4 LT sideways images 297 mm width in the protocol will be transmitted as A4 LT lengthwise images 216 mm width in the protocol 1 Not used Do not change the setting 2 Image rotation before transmission A5 HLT lengthwise 0 Disabled 1 Enabled This bit de...

Page 764: ...abled 1 Enabled This switch is only effective when user parameter 02 bit 2 printing the received date and time on received fax messages is enabled 1 The machine prints the received and printed date and time at the bottom of each received page 3 7 Not used Do not change the settings Printer Switch 01 SP No 1 103 002 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 2 Not used Do not change the settings 3 4 Maximum print widt...

Page 765: ...nting 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 4 LCT usage for fax printing 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 0 The paper feed station can be used to print fax messages and reports 1 The specified paper feed station will not be used for printing fax messages and reports Note Do not disable usage for a paper feed station which has been specified by User Parameter Switch 0F 15 or which is used for the Specified Cassette Selection f...

Page 766: ...ross reference Length reduction On Off Printer Switch 03 Bit 0 Printer Switch 04 SP No 1 103 005 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 4 Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03 0 above Maximum reducible length Paper length N x 5mm N is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4 Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 mm 0 0 0 0 1 5 mm 0 0 1 0 0 20 mm default setting 1 1 ...

Page 767: ...where communication failure occurred 1 Only destinations where communication failure occurred are printed on the Communication Failure Report 5 7 Not used Do not change the settings Printer Switch 08 Not used do not change the settings Printer Switch 09 Not used do not change the settings Printer Switch 0A Not used do not change the settings Printer Switch 0B Not used do not change the settings Pr...

Page 768: ...ed 1 Disabled 0 When page separation has taken place all the pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio 1 Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected paper size when page separation has taken place Other pages are printed without reduction Printer Switch 0F SP No 1 103 016 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 1 Smoothing feature Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Disabled 0 1 Disabled 1 0 Enabled 1 1 Not use...

Page 769: ...e the compression capabilities to be used in the transmission and to be declared in phase B handshaking of the T 30 protocol 4 Not used Do not change the setting 5 JBIG compression method Reception 0 Only basic supported 1 Basic and optional both supported Change the setting when communication problems occur using JBIG compression 6 JBIG compression method Transmission 0 Basic mode priority 1 Opti...

Page 770: ... function does not work when dialing is done from the external telephone 4 5 Not used Do not change the settings 6 to 7 Maximum printable page length available Bit 7 6 Setting 0 0 No limit 0 1 B4 364 mm 1 0 A4 297 mm 1 1 Not used The setting determined by these bits is informed to the transmitting terminal in the pre message protocol exchange in the DIS NSF frames Communication Switch 02 SP No 1 1...

Page 771: ... total error rate calculation 0 Normal method 1 French PTT requirement 0 Error rate is calculated by dividing the number of total lines by the number of error lines 1 Error rate is calculated by dividing the number of total plus error lines by the number of error lines Communication Switch 03 SP No 1 104 004 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 7 Maximum number of page retransmissions in a G3 memory transmis...

Page 772: ...he ISDN B channel 0 Fallback disabled 1 Fallback enabled 1 Enable this switch only when G4 communication errors occur because the exchanger connects G4 calls to the PSTN This problem occurs with some types of exchanger 5 Not used Do not change the setting 6 Not used Do not change the setting 7 Not used Do not change the setting Communication Switch 08 Not used do not change the settings Communicat...

Page 773: ... were no problems 1 The machine will only send back a Transfer Result Report if there were errors during communication meaning one or more of the End Receivers could not be contacted 4 Printout of the message when acting as a Transfer Station 0 Disabled 1 Enabled When the machine is acting as a Transfer Station this bit determines whether the machine prints the fax message coming in from the Reque...

Page 774: ...e not programmed and Quick Dial 05 is programmed the machine will send the report to Quick 05 Default setting 05 H 5 digits 5 7 Not used Do not change the settings Communication Switch 0D SP No 1 104 014 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 7 The available memory threshold below which ringing detection and therefore reception into memory is disabled 00 to FF Hex unit 4 kbytes e g 06 H 24 kbytes One page is a...

Page 775: ...isabled 1 Enabled 0 In immediate transmission data scanned in inch format are transmitted without conversion In memory transmission data stored in the SAF memory in mm format are transmitted without conversion Note When storing the scanned data into SAF memory the fax unit always converts the data into mm format 1 The machine converts the scanned data or stored data in the SAF memory to the format...

Page 776: ...d Do not change the setting 5 Not used Do not change the setting 6 Use of the I G3 line 0 Tx or rx 1 Tx only Change this bit to 1 when the customer requires 7 G4 Dual communication 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 1 The machine uses only one B channel for communication This enables a customer to occupy another B channel for other purposes such as internet communication Communication Switch 17 SP No 1 104 024 ...

Page 777: ...hine detects 0 as the first dialed number it automatically disables V 8 protocol Alternatively if 3 is the PSTN access code set bit 3 to 1 Communication Switch 1C SP No 1 104 029 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 1 Extension access code 8 and 9 to turn V 8 protocol On Off 0 On 1 Off Refer to communication switch 1E Example If 8 is the PSTN access code set bit 0 to 1 When the machine detects 8 as the first...

Page 778: ... used Do not change the setting 6 CED ANSam transmission 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Do not change this setting unless the communication problem is caused by the CED ANSam transmission 7 Not used Do not change the setting G3 1 Switch 02 SP No 1 105 003 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 G3 protocol mode used 0 Standard and non standard 1 Standard only Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can only communicate...

Page 779: ...ions 0 After one PPR signal received 1 After four PPR signals received ITU T standard 0 When using ECM in non standard NSF NSS mode the machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate after receiving a PPR if the following condition is met in communications at 14 4 12 0 9 6 and 7 2 kbps NTransmit N send Re NTransmit Number of transmitted frames NResend Number of frames to be retransmitted 1 When u...

Page 780: ... 0 1 1 1 16 8 k 1 0 0 0 19 2 k 1 0 0 1 21 6 k 1 0 1 0 24 0 k 1 0 1 1 26 4 k 1 1 0 0 28 8 k 1 1 0 1 31 2 k 1 1 1 0 33 6 k Other settings Not used These bits set the initial starting modem rate for transmission Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you need to change this for specific receivers If a modem rate 14 4 kbps or slower is selected V 8 protocol should be disabled manually Cross refe...

Page 781: ... 27ter V 29 0 0 1 1 V 27ter V 29 V 33 0 1 0 0 V 27ter V 29 V 17 V 33 0 1 0 1 V 27ter V 29 V 17 V33 V 34 Other settings Not used The setting of these bits is used to inform the transmitting terminal of the available modem type for the machine in receive mode If V 34 is not selected V 8 protocol must be disabled manually Cross reference V 8 protocol on off G3 switch 03 bit2 G3 1 Switch 07 SP No 1 10...

Page 782: ... V 8 V 17 rx mode External 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Keep this bit at 1 5 PSTN cable equalizer V 34 rx mode External Keep this bit at 1 6 7 Not used Do not change the settings G3 1 Switch 08 Not used do not change the settings G3 1 Switch 09 SP No 1 105 010 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 1 ISDN cable equalizer tx mode Internal Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 None 0 1 Low 1 0 Medium 1 1 High Use a higher setting if ...

Page 783: ...S 0 1 Maximum allowable carrier drop during image data reception Bit 1 Bit 0 Value ms 0 0 200 0 1 400 1 0 800 1 1 Not used These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop time Try using a longer setting if error code 0 22 is frequent 2 3 Not used Do not change the settings 4 Maximum allowable frame interval during image data reception 0 5 s 1 13 s This bit set the maximum interval between EOL end...

Page 784: ...ting 0 0 Normal P N 0 1 Oslo P 10 N 1 0 Sweden N 1 1 1 Not used P Number of pulses sent out N Number dialed 2 7 Not used Do not change the settings G3 1 Switch 0D SP No 1 105 014 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 1 Not used Do not change the settings 2 to 5 Data rate threshold during V 34 reception Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting 0 0 0 0 Normal 0 1 1 1 Lower by one step 1 1 1 1 Lower by two steps The machine changes the...

Page 785: ...in Phase C or later 0 Disabled 1 Enabled If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each error communication change this bit to 1 1 Alarm when the handset is off hook at the end of communication 0 Disabled 1 Enabled If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the handset is off hook at the end of fax communication change this bit to 1 2 7 Not used Do not change the settings ...

Page 786: ...extended DIS frames 5 Not used Do not change the setting 6 CED ANSam transmission 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Do not change this setting unless the communication problem is caused by the CED ANSam transmission 7 Not used Do not change the setting G3 2 Switch 02 SP No 1 106 003 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 G3 protocol mode used 0 Standard and non standard 1 Standard only Change this bit to 1 only when the other...

Page 787: ...k the modem rate after receiving a PPR if the following condition is met in communications at 14 4 12 0 9 6 and 7 2 kbps NTransmit N send Re NTransmit Number of transmitted frames NResend Number of frames to be retransmitted 1 When using ECM the machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate after receiving four PPRs PPR CTC These are ECM protocol signals This bit is not effective in V 34 communi...

Page 788: ...4 to 5 Initial modem type for 9 6 k or 7 2 kbps Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting 0 0 V 29 0 1 V 17 1 0 V 34 1 1 Not used These bits set the initial modem type for 9 6 and 7 2 kbps if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds 6 7 Not used Do not change the settings G3 2 Switch 06 SP No 1 106 007 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 3 Initial Rx modem rate Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting bps 0 0 0 1 2 4 k 0 0 1 0 4 8 k 0 0 1 1 7 2...

Page 789: ...ngth of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange Use the dedicated transmission parameters for specific receivers Also try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the following symptoms occurs Communication error Modem rate fallback occurs frequently Note This setting is not effective in V 34 communications 2 to 3 PSTN cable equalizer rx mode Internal Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting 0 0 None 0 1 ...

Page 790: ...When the sending terminal is controlled by a computer there may be a delay in receiving page data after the local machine accepts set up data and sends CFR This is outside the T 30 recommendation But if this delay occurs set this bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to send data Refer to error code 0 20 ITU T T 30 recommendation The first line should come within 5 s of CFR 7 Not used Do ...

Page 791: ...1 Not used P Number of pulses sent out N Number dialed 2 7 Not used Do not change the settings G3 2 Switch 0D Not used do not change the settings G3 2 Switch 0E Not used do not change the settings G3 2 Switch 0F Not used do not change the settings 3 2 7 G3 3 SWITCHES These switches require the second optional G3 interface unit The contents of the G3 3 switches are similar to the G3 2 ...

Page 792: ...e this bit to 0 if you want to have a protocol dump list of the last communication only This bit is only effective for the dump list D Bch1 1 7 Not used Do not change these settings G4 Internal Switch 04 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 2 Not used Do not change these settings 3 Auto data rate change for transmission 64 kbps to 56 kbps 0 On 1 Off 0 The machine automatically changes the transmission data rate...

Page 793: ...G4 Internal Switch 0F Not used do not change these settings G4 Internal Switch 10 Dch Layer 1 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 5 Not used Do not change these settings 6 INFO1 signal resend 0 Resend 1 No resend 0 Some DSUs may not reply to the INFO1 signal with INFO2 if there is noise in the INFO1 signal accidentally Try changing this bit to 0 to resend INFO1 before the machine displays CHECK INTERFACE 7 Not...

Page 794: ... to the SETUP signal to the receiver However some networks may require the machine to add this ID and or subaddress Only in this case should this bit be at 1 3 Attachment of the Lower Layer Capabilities 0 No 1 Yes This bit determines whether Lower Layer Capabilities are informed in the SETUP signal Keep this bit at 0 in most cases 4 Attachment of the Higher Layer Capabilities 0 Yes 1 No This bit d...

Page 795: ...d in the SETUP message In rx mode this determines the information transfer capability that the machine can use to receive a call Set this bit to 1 if the ISDN does not support 3 1 kHz audio 1 2 Not used Do not change these settings 3 to 4 Channel selection in SETUP in tx mode Bit 4 3 Setting 0 0 Any channel 0 1 B1 channel 1 0 B2 channel 1 1 Not used Any channel When this is informed to the exchang...

Page 796: ...SU as a model K200 is connected the machine receives most of the calls because the response time to a call is faster than the K200 If the customer wants the K200 to receive most of the calls adjust the response time using these bits If the customer does not want one machine to receive most of the calls use subaddresses to identify each terminal 2 Action when receiving SETUP signal containing user ...

Page 797: ...e recognized bit 7 of bit switch 17 must be 1 Also bit 0 of the Communication Switch 07 must be at 0 or Fallback from G4 to G3 will be disabled 7 This bit determines whether fallback from G4 to G3 occurs on receipt of one of the CPS codes programmed in bit switch 17 or 18 or on receipt of a certain standard code 0 Fallback occurs on receipt of any of the following CPS codes Universal Euro ISDN 3 1...

Page 798: ...Channel used in ISDN L2 64k mode 0 B1 1 B2 When making an IDSN L2 back to back test you can select either the B1 or B2 channel with this bit switch 2 7 Not used Do not change the factory settings G4 Internal Switch 1A CPS Code Used for G4 to G3 Fallback 3 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 6 Condition for fallback from G4 to G3 See the explanation for bits 0 to 6 of bit switch 17 7 Not used Do not change this...

Page 799: ...calls for another TE the call may be without HLC information Identify the type of calling terminal and change this bit to 1 if the caller is not a fax machine 2 6 Not used Do not change these settings 7 Signal attenuation for G3 fax signals received from ISDN line 6dB 0 Off 1 On 0 If an analog signal comes over digital line the signal level after decoding by the TE is theoretically the same as the...

Page 800: ...ION COMMENTS 0 to 3 Packet size Bit 3 2 1 0 Value 0 1 1 1 128 1 0 0 0 256 1 0 0 1 512 1 0 1 0 1024 1 0 1 1 2048 This value is sent in the CR packet This value must match the value stored in the other terminal or communication will stop CI will be returned If the other end returns CI check the value of the packet window size with the other party Note that this value must be the same as the value pr...

Page 801: ...ly do not change the default setting 4 7 Not used Do not change these settings G4 Parameter Switch 0C Not used do not change these settings G4 Parameter Switch 0D No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 1 Back to back test mode Bit 1 0 Setting 0 0 Off 1 0 ISDN L2 test mode TE mode Other settings Not used When doing a back to back test or doing a demonstration without a line simulator use these bits to set up on...

Page 802: ...n be changed using NCU Parameter programming SP2 103 104 and 105 if SP2 103 104 and 105 can be used this will be indicated in the Remarks column The RAM is programmed in hex code unless BCD is included in the Unit column NOTE The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU Change the fourth digit from 5 to 6 e g 680500 to 680600 for the settings for the first optional G3 interface u...

Page 803: ...ong 20 14 South Africa 21 15 Australia 22 16 New Zealand 23 17 Singapore 24 18 Malaysia 25 19 China 26 1A Taiwan 27 1B Korea 28 1C Greece 33 21 Hungary 34 22 Czech 35 23 Poland 36 24 680501 Line current detection time 680502 Line current wait time 680503 Line current drop detect time 20 ms Line current detection is disabled Line current is not detected if 680501 contains FF 680504 PSTN dial tone f...

Page 804: ...N busy tone frequency lower limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680517 PABX dial tone frequency upper limit high byte 680518 PABX dial tone frequency upper limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680519 PABX dial tone frequency lower limit high byte 68051A PABX dial tone frequency lower limit low byte Hz BCD If bot...

Page 805: ...on a setting of 4 cycles means that ON OFF ON or OFF ON OFF must be detected twice Tolerance Bit 1 0 0 0 75 Bits 2 and 3 must always 0 1 50 be kept at 0 1 0 25 1 1 12 5 Bits 7 6 5 4 number of cycles required for cadence detection 680534 International dial tone frequency upper limit high byte 680535 International dial tone frequency upper limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone de...

Page 806: ...Notes 3 6 and 8 Function 06 2 parameter 11 68054B Break time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3 Function 06 2 parameter 12 68054C Make time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3 Function 06 2 parameter 13 68054D Time between final OHDI relay closure and DO relay opening or closing 1 ms See Notes 3 6 and 8 Function 06 2 parameter 14 This parameter is only valid in Europe 68054E Minimum pause between dia...

Page 807: ...8055D PSTN access pause time 20 ms This time is waited for each pause input after the PSTN access code If this address contains FF H the pause time stored in address 68054F is used Do not set a number more than 7 in the UK 68055E Progress tone detection level and cadence detection enable flags Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 dBm 0 0 0 25 0 0 0 1 35 0 0 1 0 30 0 1 0 0 40 0 1 1 0 49 0 Bits 2 0 See Note 2 68055F t...

Page 808: ...ctory setting 500 ms 680582 Bits 0 and 1 Handset off hook detection time Bit 1 0 Setting 0 0 200 ms 0 1 800 ms Other Not used Bits 2 and 3 Handset on hook detection time Bit 3 2 Setting 0 0 200 ms 0 1 800 ms Other Not used Bits 4 to 7 Not used 680583 to 6805A0 Not used Do not change the settings 6805A1 Acceptable CED detection frequency upper limit high byte 6805A2 Acceptable CED detection frequen...

Page 809: ... AI short protocol tone 800Hz detection frequency lower limit high byte 6805B2 Acceptable AI short protocol tone 800Hz detection frequency lower limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 6805B3 Detection time for 800 Hz AI short protocol tone 20 ms Factory setting 360 ms 6805B4 PSTN Tx level from the modem N 3 dBm Function 06 2 parameter 01 6805B5 PSTN 1100 Hz...

Page 810: ...ne cadence detection enabled Italy If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1 the functions of the following RAM addresses are changed 680508 if bit 0 1 or 680538 if bit 2 1 tolerance for on or off state duration and number of cycles required for detection coded as in address 680533 68050B if bit 0 1 or 68053B if bit 2 1 on time hex code unit 20 ms 68050C if bit 0 1 or 68053C if bit 2 1 off time hex code unit ...

Page 811: ...rance Between Ds opening and Di closing 7 Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz e g 800Hz tone for AI short protocol refer to the setting at 6805B5h Tones which frequency is higher than 1500Hz refer to the setting at 6805B6h 8 68054A 68054D 68054E The actual inter digit pause pulse dial mode is the sum of the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A 68054D and 68054E ...

Page 812: ...0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1 2 Press Dest Management in the facsimile standby mode 3 Press Program Change Delete Quick Dial 4 Select the destination key you want to program 5 When the programmed dial number is displayed press Start Make sure that the LED of the Start button is lit as green 6 The settings for the switch 01 are now displayed Press the bit number that you wish to change 7 To scroll...

Page 813: ...If communication with a particular remote terminal often contains errors the signal level may be inappropriate Adjust the Tx level for communications with that terminal until the results are better If the setting is Disabled the NCU parameter 01 setting is used Note Do not use settings other than listed on the left 5 to 7 Cable equalizer Bit 7 6 5 Setting 0 0 0 None 0 0 1 Low 0 1 0 Medium 0 1 1 Hi...

Page 814: ...short protocol 0 Off 1 Disabled Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile Manual for details about AI Short Protocol If the setting is Disabled the bit switch setting is used 7 Not used Do not change the setting Switch 04 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 1 Inch mm conversion before tx Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Inch mm conversion available 0 1 Inch only 1 0 Not used 1 1 Disabled The machine uses inch bas...

Page 815: ...it switch setting is used 6 to 7 ECM during transmission Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting 0 0 Off 0 1 On 1 0 Not used 1 1 Disabled For example if ECM is switched on but is not wanted when sending to a particular terminal use the 0 0 setting Note that V 8 V 34 protocol and JBIG compression are automatically disabled if ECM is disabled If the setting is Disabled the bit switch setting is used Switch 05 Not used ...

Page 816: ... parameter switch 6 bit 4 is used Switch 10 Optional ISDN G4 kit required No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 Attachment of the Higher Layer Capabilities This bit determines whether Higher Layer Capabilities are informed in the SETUP signal or not 1 Not used Do not change the setting 2 ISDN G3 information transfer capability 0 3 1 kHz audio 1 Speech In tx mode this determines the information transfer capabilit...

Page 817: ...bit switches 680090 to 68009F H G3 2 bit switches 6800A0 to 6800AF H G3 3 bit switches 6800D0 H User parameter switch 00 SWUER_00 Not used 6800D1 H User parameter switch 01 SWUSR_01 Not used 6800D2 H User parameter switch 02 SWUSR_02 Bit 0 Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 1 Center mark printing on received copies This switch is not printed on the user paramet...

Page 818: ...tch 05 SWUSR_05 Bit 0 Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Bits 1 and 2 Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages Paper end toner end jam and during night mode Bit 2 1 Setting 0 0 The machine receives all the fax messages 0 1 The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI 1 0 The machine receives the fax messages with ...

Page 819: ...t 7 Polling Standby duration 0 Once 1 No limit 6800DC H User parameter switch 12 SWUSR_0C Not used 6800DD H User parameter switch 13 SWUSR_0D This switch is not printed on the user parameter list Bits 0 to 4 Not used Bit 5 Action when receiving a SETUP signal containing no called number and the G4 subscriber number was programmed in this machine 0 Respond to the call 1 Do not respond to the call B...

Page 820: ...r settings Not used Bits 3 and 4 Not used Bit 5 Using the cassette specified by bits 0 1 and 2 above only 0 On 1 Off Bits 6 and 7 Not used 6800E0 H User parameter switch 16 SWUSR_10 This switch is not printed on the user parameter list Bits 0 and 1 Not used Bit 2 Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4 LT size paper is not available 0 A3 has priority 1 B4 has priority Bits...

Page 821: ...rtrait Tx This switch is not printed on the user parameter list 0 Off 1 On Bit 4 Reduction of sample images on reports to 50 in the main scan and sub scan directions This switch is not printed on the user parameter list 0 Technician adjustment printer switch 0E bits 3 and 4 1 50 reduction Bit 5 Use of A5 size paper for reports This switch is not printed on the user parameter list 0 Off 1 On Bits 6...

Page 822: ...e machine cannot use the G3 standard analog line for detecting the ringing and on hook dialing 6800F0 to 6800FF H G4 Parameter Switches 680100 to 68011F H G4 Internal Switches 680180 to 68019F H Service station s fax number SP3 101 See 68036C H for the type of network used for this number 6801A0 to 6801A3 H Own fax PABX extension number 6801AA to 6801B3 H Own fax number PSTN 6801B4 to 6801C7 H Own...

Page 823: ...cter 680340 to 680342 H PSTN 1 line settings 680340 Bits 0 and 1 PSTN access method from behind a PABX Bit 1 0 Setting 0 0 Loop start 0 1 Ground start 1 0 Flash start 1 1 Not used Bit 2 Telephone line type 0 PSTN 1 PABX Bits 3 and 4 Dialing type Bit 4 3 Setting 0 0 Pulse dialing 0 1 Not used 1 0 Tone dialing 1 1 Not used Bits 4 to 7 Not used 680341 PSTN access number for loop start Access number H...

Page 824: ... 3 Not used Bit 4 Function Upgrade unit 0 Not installed 1 Installed Bit 5 to 7 Not used 680385 H Optional equipment Read only Do not change the settings Bit 0 Function Upgrade unit 0 Not installed 1 Installed Bit 1 to 3 Not used Bit 4 G3 2 0 Not installed 1 Installed Bit 5 G3 3 0 Not installed 1 Installed Bit 6 ISDN unit 0 Not installed 1 Installed Bit 7 Not used 6803B8 to 6803CF H G4 terminal ID ...

Page 825: ...0B H Modem ROM version Read only 680406 H Part number low 680407 H Part number high 680408 H Control low 680409 H Control high 68040A H DSP low 68040B H DSP high 680464 H Time for economy transmission hour in 24h clock format BCD 680465 H Time for economy transmission minute BCD 680482 H Transmission monitor volume 00 07 H 680483 H Reception monitor volume 00 07 H 680484 H On hook monitor volume 0...

Page 826: ...full dual access Up to two extra G3 interface options can be installed The option G3 unit consists of two PCBs G3 board and NCU 2 Fax Function Upgrade Unit JBIG compression becomes available In addition this expands the system s SRAM capacity to hold programmed telephone numbers memory files etc 3 Memory Expansion This expands the SAF memory and the page memory used for image rotation without this...

Page 827: ...mpression and reconstruction DCR DMA control Clock generation DRAM backup control Ringing signal tone detection FBI FACE Bridge Interface Interface between the PCI bus and the FACE DMA controll Modem R288F 29 V 34 V33 V17 V 29 V 27ter V 21 and V 8 SG3 SG3 SRAM 512 kB Flash ROM 3 MB Analog Circuit V 34 MODEM Monitor Speaker NCU Function Upgrade Unit 512 kB DIMM 32 MB DRAM 8 MB FBI CPU BUS DMA BUS M...

Page 828: ...em and user parameter storage is backed up by a lithium battery Memory back up A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in the SRAM in case the base copier s main switch is turned off A Rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory DRAM for 1 hour Switches Item Description SW1 Switches the SRAM backup battery on off SW2 Reset switch to reboot the FCU board SW3 Determine...

Page 829: ...s connected to a dry line DB1 Also remove DB1 when the machine is connected to a dry line Ring Detection Circuit OHDISW TIP RING T1 T2 TRXD Current Sensor Hook1 Hook0 OHDI SW NCU JP7 JP8 ExRing CML Relay Noise Filter Surge Protection Over current Protection Surge Protection DC Loop L Transformer CMLSW Noise Filter DB1 A895D520 WMF ...

Page 830: ...L Low H High CTR21 Common Technical Regulation 21 France Germany UK Italy Austria Belgium Denmark Finland Ireland Norway Sweden Switzerland Portugal Holland Spain Israel Greece TIP RING SHUNT GS T1 R1 TRXD TIP R1 SHUNT GS T1 OHDISW Hook0 RSEL DOSW DCLSW Hook1 ExRing CSEL Ring Detection Circuit Current Sensor Filter 16Hz CML Relay DO Sw GSSW OHDI Sw GS Sw DC Loop CMLLSW Noise Filter Noise Filter A8...

Page 831: ...JBIG interface Flash ROM 512KB 4 Mbit flash ROM for SG3 software storage 512KB 4 Mbit flash ROM for Panasonic modem software storage DRAM 512 KB DRAM shared between ECM buffer line buffer and working memory QM coder QM coder for JBIG compression and decompression V 34 Modem Panasonic V 34 modem MN195003MFL DRAM 4MB JBIG M65761 Flash ROM 4MB Program DATA ADDRESS BUS MN195003MFL Modem Flash ROM 4MB ...

Page 832: ...ation Control Processor 16 bit CPU which controls the entire board HDLC control Channel select for B channel interface control CODEC A D D A converter for ISDN G3 communication LAPD Controller ISDN layer 1 and LAPD control ROM 512 kB 4 Mbit Flash ROM for system software storage DRAM 2MB 16 Mbit DRAM used Flash ROM DRAM ICCP SYSTEM BUS SiG4 CODEC LAPD Controller ISDN Interface Bch Reset Circuit Dch...

Page 833: ...125 B547 Fax Option B547 4 3 VIDEO DATA PATH 4 3 1 TRANSMISSION SCANNER BICU FBI FACE Page Memory DCR SAF DCR QM CODER DCR QM CODER Modem SiG4 NCU Modem NCU ISDN G4 ISDN G3 Analog G3 Analog G3 FCU SG3 Option B360D511 WMF ...

Page 834: ...ogrammed in the fax unit s scanner bit switches not the copier s SP modes Then the FCU stores the data in page memory and compresses the data for transmission Either the NCU or SiG4 optional transmits the data to the line JBIG Transmission Memory transmission If the receiver has JBIG compression the data goes from the DCR to the QM Coder on the Function Upgrade Unit for JBIG compression Then eithe...

Page 835: ... 127 B547 Fax Option B547 Adjustments Line used for G3 transmissions PSTN or ISDN System switch 0A bit 6 Line used for G3 transmissions PSTN 1 PSTN 2 System switch 16 bit 1 I G3 modem default System switch 16 bit 2 and 3 ...

Page 836: ...IDEO DATA PATH B547 128 SM 4 3 2 RECEPTION NCU Modem Analog G3 Analog G3 ISDN G3 ISDN G4 NCU Modem SiG4 SAF DCR Page Memory FACE FBI QM CODER CCD DCR DCR QM CODER BICU Printer FCU SG3 Option B360D512 WMF ...

Page 837: ... the BiCU If the optional G3 unit is installed the line that the message comes in on depends on the telephone number dialled by the other party the optional G3 unit has a different telephone number from the main fax board JBIG Reception When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN 1 the standard analog line the data is sent to the Function Upgrade Unit for decompression Then the data is stored ...

Page 838: ...rd The receiver can set up the personal box as a forwarding station any messages entering the box will be forwarded to another station Items to program at the receiving machine Items Note SUB Code Box number Required Box name Required Password SID Optional Receiver 1 forwarding destination Optional Quick Dial Items for the sender to specify when setting up the transmission Items Note SUB Code Box ...

Page 839: ...s a SID code the SID code stored in the receiver must be the same or the communication will be disconnected Items to program at the receiving machine Items Note SUB Code Box number Required Box name Required Password SID Optional Receiver Final destinations Required Quick Dial Items for the sender to specify when setting up the transmission Items Note SUB Code Box number Required must be the same ...

Page 840: ...the document from other people at the same location to print the stored document this password must be input The person who wishes to receive the document does not have to know this PWD code but only has to know the SEP code Items to program at the machine that has the document on standby for polling Items Note SEP Code Box number Required Box name Required Password PWD for printing the stored doc...

Page 841: ...time through the two or three lines at once Option Available Line Type Available protocol Combinations Standard only PSTN G3 Extra G3 Interface Unit PSTN PSTN G3 G3 PSTN ISDN G3 G4 ISDN Unit ISDN I G3 G4 Extra G3 Interface Unit Extra G3 Interface Unit PSTN PSTN PSTN G3 G3 G3 PSTN PSTN ISDN G3 G3 G4 PSTN ISDN G3 I G3 or G3 I G3 G4 Extra G3 Interface Unit ISDN Unit ISDN I G3 I G3 or I G3 G4 ...

Page 842: ...nt sever can be used for the fax transmission in many times More than one document and the scanned document can be combined into one file and then the file can be transmitted When using the document server the SAF memory is not used The document is compressed with MMR and stored Up to 9000 pages can be stored 1 file Up to 1000 pages with Fax Function Upgrade and Expansion Memory from the fax appli...

Page 843: ...47 Fax Option B547 4 4 4 LAN FAX DRIVER HD CONTROLLER FBI FACE DCR Modem NCU DATA ADDRESS BUS To PSTN SiG4 To ISDN FCU Page Memory SAF NIC LAN NIC Fax Driver Application Compressed MMR Fax Number PC Address Book BICU PRINTER B360D515 WMF ...

Page 844: ...the print MMR data in the page memory on the controller Then the machine decompresses the print data and prints out The decompressed print data is transferred to the FCU and is stored to page memory Even if the Expansion Memory is not installed it is possible to transmit and print the document from the PC with 400 dpi resolution However the data is converted to 200 dpi and printed out if the data ...

Page 845: ...is stored on the HDD Up to a maximum of 2 000 items can be stored for addresses 4 5 1 ADDRESS BOOK BACKUP The address data can be backed up and frequently backing up the address book data is recommended If for any reason data can no longer be read from the HDD you can use the backed up data to restore the address book Overview of Data Backup HDD IC CARD FCU IC CARD 1 2 3 B547D501 WMF ...

Page 846: ... SP5846 52 UCS Settings All Directory Info Download 2 FCU MBU IC Card Address data stored in the FCU MBU can be uploaded to an IC card with SP5846 51 UCS Settings All Directory Info Upload or address data backed up on the IC card can be downloaded to the FCU with SP5846 52 UCS Settings All Directory Info Download 3 HDD FCU Address data stored on the HDD can be uploaded to the FCU MBU with SP5846 8...

Page 847: ...o the HDD If HDD is not present then the address data is downloaded to the FCU 3 SP5846 080 UCS Settings FCU Backup This SP mode is used to take fax address data from among the address data on the HDD and upload it to the FCU However the FCU is capable of holding only up to 500 items for address data so if more than 500 address items are stored on the HDD only the first and oldest 500 address on t...

Page 848: ...8 x 7 7 lines mm Detail 8 x 15 4 line mm Fine Note1 16 x15 4 line mm Super Fine See Note 1 200 x 100 dpi Standard 200 x 200 dpi Detail 400 x 400 dpi Super Fine See Note 1 NOTE 1 Optional Expansion Memory required Transmission Time G3 3 s at 28800 bps Measured with G3 ECM using memory for an ITU T 1 test document Slerexe letter at standard resolution Data Compression MH MR MMR JBIG optional Fax Fun...

Page 849: ...he capabilities of each programmable item will change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit is installed Note With HDD column has been deleted Item Standard With Fax Function Upgrade Unit Quick Dial 500 2000 Groups 64 64 Destination per Group 500 500 Boxes Information Personal Transfer 150 400 Destinations dialed from the ten key pad overall 100 1000 Programs 100 200 Auto Document 6 18 Comm...

Page 850: ...n file 800 800 Maximum number of page for memory transmission 400 3000 Memory capacity for memory transmission Note With the Fax Function Upgrade Unit 160 2080 NOTE Measured using an ITU T 1 test document Slerexe letter at the standard resolution the auto image density mode and the Text mode 3 MACHINE CONFIGURATION Item Machine Code Remarks Fax Option Type 2045 B360 G3 Interface Unit Type 2045 B36...

Page 851: ...TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS ...

Page 852: ...ER LD035 LD045 RICOH AFICIO 2035 2045 SAVIN 4035 4045 SUBJECT SERVICE MANUAL INSERT Due to a printing error the B538 Bridge Unit section was not included with the B079 B082 Service Manual Please replace the information in your service manual with the information included with this bulletin PAGES i Bridge Unit TOC Page 1 thru 6 Bridge Unit Section SERVICE MANUAL ...

Page 853: ...BRIDGE UNIT B538 ...

Page 854: ...ATION 1 1 1 SPECIFICATIONS 1 1 2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 2 1 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 3 1 4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 3 1 5 DRIVE LAYOUT 4 2 DETAILED DESCRIPTION 5 2 1 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM 5 3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 6 3 1 EXIT SENSOR REPLACEMENT 6 ...

Page 855: ... Bridge Unit B538 1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION 1 1 SPECIFICATIONS Paper Size Standard sizes A6 lengthwise to A3 HLT to DLT Non standard sizes Width 100 to 305 mm Length 148 to 432 mm Paper Weight 52 g m2 135 g m2 16 lb 42 lb ...

Page 856: ...NT LAYOUT B538 2 SM 1 2 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 Upper Exit Roller 2 Junction Gate Solenoid 3 Junction Gate 4 1st Transport Roller 5 Relay Sensor 6 2nd Transport Roller 7 Left Exit Roller A688V500 WMF 2 3 1 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 857: ...ON Symbol Name Function Index No Motors M1 Cooling Fan Cools the transport unit 4 Sensors S1 Tray Exit Checks for misfeeds 3 S2 Relay Checks for misfeeds 7 Switches SW1 Tray Exit Unit Detects when the tray exit unit is opened 5 SW2 Right Guide Detects when the right guide is opened 2 SW3 Left Guide Detects when the left guide is opened 1 Solenoids SOL1 Junction Gate Moves the junction gate to dire...

Page 858: ...DRIVE LAYOUT B538 4 SM 1 5 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Left Exit Roller 2 2nd Transport Roller 3 Upper Exit Roller 4 1st Transport Roller A688V502 WMF 2 3 4 1 ...

Page 859: ...ch is controlled by the junction gate solenoid B When the upper tray is selected the junction gate solenoid turns on and the paper is sent to the upper tray through the upper exit roller C When the left tray or the finisher is selected the junction gate stays off and the paper is sent to the left tray or the finisher through the transport rollers D and the left exit roller A688D500 WMF C B A D ...

Page 860: ...IT SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1 Remove the whole unit from the copier 2 Remove the rear upper cover A 1 screw 3 Remove the upper cover unit B 2 screws 2 connectors 4 Remove the exit guide plate C 2 screws 5 Replace the exit sensor D 1 connector A688R500 WMF A688R501 WMF A B C D ...

Page 861: ...TNER 3532 4532 LANIER LD035 LD045 RICOH AFICIO 2035 2045 SAVIN 4035 4045 SUBJECT NEW PART NV RAM GENERAL The NV RAM for the expansion box has been made available as a service part The following part update is being issued for all B079 b082 Parts Catalogs REFERENCE NEW PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM B0049009 NV RAM 0 1 77 22 DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER ...

Page 862: ...ESTETNER 3532 4532 LANIER LD035 LD045 RICOH AFICIO 2035 2045 SAVIN 4035 4045 SUBJECT NEW PART NV RAM GENERAL The NV RAM for the expansion box has been made available as a service part The following part update is being issued for all B079 B082 Parts Catalogs REFERENCE NEW PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM B0049099 NV RAM 0 1 77 22 DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER ...

Page 863: ...ng an option Important 1 Before removing the controller board make sure to unplug the main power cord and all interface cables first 2 Before touching the controller board or other components make sure to discharge any static electricity from your hands by touching a metallic surface nearby machine frame or other 3 Make sure not to touch the controller board circuit pattern or any of the contact p...

Page 864: ...copy when the roller rotates around again causing the ghost image SOLUTION 1 Increase SP2201 2 Development Bias Adjustment ID Sensor Pattern by 50V and then change SP2210 ID Sensor Pattern Interval to a value of 1 2 Print out about 5 pages of an image containing a high Black coverage ratio such as a photograph 3 Check the value of SP3103 2 Vsp and make sure it is between 0 2 0 3V If it is not repe...

Page 865: ... B is mistakenly sent to destination A Documents set for Broadcasting to destinations A and B are then sent to destination A twice NOTE In addition the machine freezes if error 6 06 G3 ECM coding decoding error occurs while receiving CAUSE Firmware Bug SOLUTION Upgrade fax firmware using FAX Service Card Firmware to version 0 04 or later NOTE Firmware version 0 04 or later can be downloaded at the...

Page 866: ...LE MODEL GESTETNER GESTETNER GESTETNER GESTETNER 3532 4532 3532 4532 3532 4532 3532 4532 LANIER LANIER LANIER LANIER LD035 LD045 LD035 LD045 LD035 LD045 LD035 LD045 RICOH RICOH RICOH RICOH AFICIO 2035 2045 AFICIO 2035 2045 AFICIO 2035 2045 AFICIO 2035 2045 SAVIN SAVIN SAVIN SAVIN 4035 4045 4035 4045 4035 4045 4035 4045 SUBJECT SERVICE MANUAL INSERT The ServiceManual pages listed belowmust be repla...

Page 867: ...nt service calls successive groups of 10 7502 Total Paper Jam Counter Displays the total number of copy jams Display range 0000 9999 7503 Total Original Jam Counter Displays the total number of original jams Display range 0000 9999 Paper Jam Counter by Jam Location Displays the total number of copy jams by location Display range 0000 9999 A Paper Late error occurs when the paper fails to activate ...

Page 868: ...Fin Off 41 Exit Fin Off 57 LCT Tray 58 Vert Trans 1 On 59 Vert Trans 2 On 60 Bank 1 On 62 Registration Off 63 External Tray Off 66 Duplex Exit 1 Off 67 Duplex Exit 2 Off 68 Duplex Exit 3 Off 69 Duplex Feed Off 73 Exit Duplex On 7504 74 1 Bin Tray Check Out Error Total Original Jam by Location Displays the total number of original jams by location These jams occur when the original does not activat...

Page 869: ...TETNER 3532 4532 3532 4532 3532 4532 3532 4532 LANIER LANIER LANIER LANIER LD035 LD045 LD035 LD045 LD035 LD045 LD035 LD045 RICOH RICOH RICOH RICOH AFICIO 2035 2045 AFICIO 2035 2045 AFICIO 2035 2045 AFICIO 2035 2045 SAVIN SAVIN SAVIN SAVIN 4035 4045 4035 4045 4035 4045 4035 4045 SUBJECT SERVICE MANUAL INSERT The ServiceManual pages listed belowmust be replaced with thepages supplied An arrowhas hig...

Page 870: ...nt service calls successive groups of 10 7502 Total Paper Jam Counter Displays the total number of copy jams Display range 0000 9999 7503 Total Original Jam Counter Displays the total number of original jams Display range 0000 9999 Paper Jam Counter by Jam Location Displays the total number of copy jams by location Display range 0000 9999 A Paper Late error occurs when the paper fails to activate ...

Page 871: ...Staple Stitch 40 Ent Fin Off 7504 41 Exit Fin Off Total Original Jam by Location Displays the total number of original jams by location These jams occur when the original does not activate the sensors A Paper Late error occurs when the paper fails to activate the sensor at the precise time A Paper Linger paper jam occurs when the paper remains at the sensor for longer than the prescribed time 1 At...

Page 872: ...he paper size code in hex TOTAL is the total jam error count SP7 003 DATE is the date the previous jam s occurred Paper Size Code hex A4 LEF 05 A5 LEF 06 B5 LEF 0E LT LEF 26 HLT LEF 2C A3 SEF 84 A4 SEF 85 A5 SEF 86 B4 SEF 8D B5 SEF 8E DLT SEF A0 LG SEF A4 LT SEF A6 HLT SEF AC 7507 Others FF Original Jam History 1 Last 2 Last 1 3 Last 2 4 Last 3 5 Last 4 6 Last 5 7 Last 6 8 Last 7 9 Last 8 7508 10 ...

Page 873: ...nter Reset Magnification Resets all counters of SP7 301 Copy Count Magnification 7825 Total Counter Reset No longer used Executing this SP has no effect This SP is no longer required because the counter initialized set to 0 at the factory 7826 MF Device Error Count This display is for the Japanese version only Japan Only 7827 MF Device Error Count Clear This SP is for the Japanese version only Cle...

Page 874: ...ss Execute to clear counter SP7320 Doc Svr Scan Count 7841 Doc Svr Original Size Clear Press Execute to clear counter SP7321 Doc Svr Original Size Display 7842 Doc Svr Print Size Clear Press Execute to clear counter SP7323 Doc Svr Print Size Display 7843 Doc Svr Print Job Counter Clear Press Execute to clear counter SP7324 Doc Svr Print Job Counter 7844 Doc Svr Job Count Page No Clear Press Execut...

Page 875: ...ES 1 16 Set Paper Size Dial Updated Information 4 13 through 4 15 SC740 Updated Information 4 15 through 4 17 SC741 Updated Information 4 18 through 4 22 Only Header information was added 5 41 SP5 104 Updated Information 5 85 Deleted text from SP5 801 5 103 Deleted text from Analyzing the Debug Log Binary Data 6 7 Deleted text from SDRAM DIMM box 6 57 Correction for paper Width and Thickness Chart...

Page 876: ...display The 1st 2nd 3rd and 4th paper trays are provided with paper size dial selectors The dial settings on the paper trays have priority over the UP settings However if you select the asterisk position on the paper size dial you can select the paper size with the UP setting 8 Check the copy quality and machine operation NOTE The test pattern print procedure is slightly different for this machine...

Page 877: ...gnal to the finisher board 2 The exit motor sensor does not send the clock signal to the finisher board for certain period while the exit motor is on Exit motor defective Exit motor sensor defective Upper exit plate movement error 03 1 The upper exit guide 2 switch does not turn on within 1s after the guide plate motor turns on 2 The upper exit guide sensor does not activate within 1s after the gu...

Page 878: ...n 15s after being turned on 2 The shift tray HP sensor does not activate within 15s after the tray lift motor turns on 3 The shift tray upper limit switch turns on while the shift tray is being raised 4 Lift motor sensors 1 2 do not send the clock signals to the finisher board every 200ms while the tray lift motor is on Tray lift motor defective Lift motor sensor 1 defective Lift motor sensor 2 de...

Page 879: ... HP sensor does not deactivate within 1 25s 2 After the positioning plate motor turns on to return the positioning plate to its home position the positioning plate HP sensor does activate within 1s Positioning plate motor defective Positioning plate HP sensor defective Folder roller motor error 02 1 The folder roller motor sensor doesn t send the clock pulse to the booklet unit board within a cert...

Page 880: ...staple hammer HP switch does not turn on within 0 5s after the rear stapler motor turns on during jam recovery Front stapler motor defective Front staple hammer HP switch defective Rear stapler motor defective Rear staple hammer HP switch defective Folder plate motor error 741 06 1 After the folder plate motor turns on to return the folder plate to its home position the folder plate HP sensor does...

Page 881: ... booklet exit cover sensor are all activated doors closed the lower door safety switch does not turn on within 1s after a copy job or warm up idling begins 3 When the booklet entrance guide sensor lower door sensor and booklet exit cover sensor are all activated doors closed the booklet exit cover safety switch does not turn on within 1s after a copy job or warm up idling begins Booklet entrance g...

Page 882: ...urned an error during the self diagnostic test Network interface board defective Controller board defective Self diagnostic Error NVRAM 824 B The resident non volatile RAM returned an error during the self diagnostic test NVRAM damaged or abnormal Backup battery has discharged NVRAM socket damaged Self diagnostic Error NVRAM Optional NVRAM 826 B The NVRAM or optional NVRAM returned an error during...

Page 883: ...LAN card not inserted into the wireless LAN board 854 Wireless LAN Error Card Error 2 B The board that holds the wireless LAN card can be accessed but the wireless LAN card 802 11b Bluetooth itself cannot be accessed while the machine is operating Wireless LAN card has been removed 855 Wireless LAN Error 3 Card Error 3 B An error is detected for the wireless LAN card 802 11b or Bluetooth Wireless ...

Page 884: ...rom either the operation panel or the network Software defective HDD defective 871 FCU Flash ROM Error B The address book written into the flash ROM mounted on the FCU is detected as defective Flash ROM device defective Replace flash ROM on the MBU 880 MLB Error B A request for access to the MLB Media Link Board was not answered within the specified time MLB defective Electronic total counter erro...

Page 885: ...ective BICU defective Connectors between BICU and controller loose or defective SIB defective Software write parameter setting error 986 C An unstable area at the storage destination in the settings table is set NULL for the parameter received by the write module Software defective Software performance error 990 B The software attempted to perform an unexpected operation Software defective Interna...

Page 886: ...defective An option required by the application RAM DIMM board is not installed Application start error 998 B After power on the application does not start within 60 s All applications neither start nor end normally Software defective An option required by the application RAM DIMM board is not installed Program download error The download program print data language data from the IC card does not ...

Page 887: ...s SP if the customer cannot attain clean copies after performing automatic density adjustment 5112 Non Standard Paper Selection Determines whether a non standard paper size can be initialized for copying or not 0 No 1 Yes If is selected a non standard size can be input using the UP mode 5113 Selects the corresponding key for installed devices such as a coin lock Japan only 0 5 0 1 step 0 None 1 Ke...

Page 888: ...tion Referring to the SMC data lists re enter any values which had been changed from their factory settings Do SP 3 001 2 ID Sensor Initial Setting and SP4 911 1 HDD media check 6 Check the copy quality and the paper path and do any necessary adjustments 5 1 10 SOFTWARE RESET The software can be reboot when the machine hangs up Use the following procedure Turn the main power switch off and on or P...

Page 889: ... must be sent to the Design Center for analysis Since the amount of data can be fairly large approximately 4 MB compress the data with a standard compression program like ZIP or LZH and send it via email If a PC and the software for converting the IC card data to binary are not available you can send or deliver the IC card Rev 09 2003 ...

Page 890: ... IEEE1284 Centronics I F Engine I F PCI MB HDD More than 20 GB DC Conv 3V 5V IEEE 1394 USB 2 0 IEEE 802 11b Bluetooth Only One NVRAM RTC 32kB NVRAM 32kB CPU I F 120MHz MEMORY I F 120MHz DC Conv 3V 5V Resident Flash ROM 12MB System NIB Firmware ROM_DIMM Printer Scanner ROM_DIMM PS3 Option Option Options Option BICU FCU Option Option Option B079D901 WMF Rev 09 2003 ...

Page 891: ...297 mm Default 1450 V SP2309 1 Paper Lower Width a Width limit Default 150 mm SP2309 2 Paper Upper Width b Width limit Default 216 mm SP2914 1 Cα Adjust 10V step Default 150 V SP2914 2 Cβ Adjust 10V step Default 0 V The way that these SP modes are used is shown below For example with the default settings if the paper width fed from the by pass tray is 200 mm the charge roller voltage will be 1450 ...

Page 892: ... paper OHP sheets etc can also be loaded in the by pass tray but adjustments must be performed with the SP modes listed below in order to avoid jams and misfeeds SP Mode SP Name SP2 201 1 Development Bias Width 216 297 mm Default 510 V SP2 309 1 Paper Lower Width a Width limit Default 150 mm SP2 309 2 Paper Upper Width b Width limit Default 216 mm SP2 914 3 Process Control Setting Bγ Adjust 10V st...

Page 893: ... SCATTER PREVENTION To reduce the incidence of toner scattering the sponge strip has been replaced with a velvet strip A that extends across the length of the transfer belt unit At each end of the strip B and C new seals have been added B079D723 WMF A B C Rev 09 2003 ...

Page 894: ... kW Warm up Less than 1 3 kW Less than 1 3 kW Stand by Less than 170 W Less than 195 W Auto Off Mode Ave 8 W h NA Ave 9 W h EU Asia Ave 8 W h Ave 9 W h EU Asia Maximum Less than 1 44 kW NA Less than 1 5 kW EU Asia Less than 1 44 kW NA Less than 1 5 kW EU Asia Noise Emission Mode Model Mainframe Only Full System Copying B079 B082 69 dB A or less 70 dB A or less 73 dB A or less 74 dB A or less Stand...

Page 895: ...See Note 3 C B377 31 4 hole Northern Europe Key Counter Bracket C A674 User Account Enhance Unit C B443 Copier CSS Kit A886 C A886 Fax Option U B547 G3 Interface Unit U B591 Function Upgrade Board C A892 SAF Memory C G578 Fax Handset USA model only C A646 Printer Scanner Unit U B548 PostScript3 Unit U G354 17 Network Interface Board C B525 03 1394 Interface Unit C G336 USB 2 0 Interface Board C B5...

Page 896: ...AGES 1 16 Set Paper Size Dial Updated Information 4 13 through 4 15 SC740 Updated Information 4 15 through 4 17 SC741 Updated Information 4 18 through 4 22 Only Header information was added 4 23 Intentionally left blank 5 41 SP5 104 Updated Information 5 85 Deleted text from SP5 801 5 103 Deleted text from Analyzing the Debug Log Binary Data 6 7 Deleted text from SDRAM DIMM box 6 57 Correction for...

Page 897: ...display The 1st 2nd 3rd and 4th paper trays are provided with paper size dial selectors The dial settings on the paper trays have priority over the UP settings However if you select the asterisk position on the paper size dial you can select the paper size with the UP setting 8 Check the copy quality and machine operation NOTE The test pattern print procedure is slightly different for this machine...

Page 898: ...gnal to the finisher board 2 The exit motor sensor does not send the clock signal to the finisher board for certain period while the exit motor is on Exit motor defective Exit motor sensor defective Upper exit plate movement error 03 1 The upper exit guide 2 switch does not turn on within 1s after the guide plate motor turns on 2 The upper exit guide sensor does not activate within 1s after the gu...

Page 899: ...n 15s after being turned on 2 The shift tray HP sensor does not activate within 15s after the tray lift motor turns on 3 The shift tray upper limit switch turns on while the shift tray is being raised 4 Lift motor sensors 1 2 do not send the clock signals to the finisher board every 200ms while the tray lift motor is on Tray lift motor defective Lift motor sensor 1 defective Lift motor sensor 2 de...

Page 900: ... HP sensor does not deactivate within 1 25s 2 After the positioning plate motor turns on to return the positioning plate to its home position the positioning plate HP sensor does activate within 1s Positioning plate motor defective Positioning plate HP sensor defective Folder roller motor error 02 1 The folder roller motor sensor doesn t send the clock pulse to the booklet unit board within a cert...

Page 901: ...staple hammer HP switch does not turn on within 0 5s after the rear stapler motor turns on during jam recovery Front stapler motor defective Front staple hammer HP switch defective Rear stapler motor defective Rear staple hammer HP switch defective Folder plate motor error 741 06 1 After the folder plate motor turns on to return the folder plate to its home position the folder plate HP sensor does...

Page 902: ... booklet exit cover sensor are all activated doors closed the lower door safety switch does not turn on within 1s after a copy job or warm up idling begins 3 When the booklet entrance guide sensor lower door sensor and booklet exit cover sensor are all activated doors closed the booklet exit cover safety switch does not turn on within 1s after a copy job or warm up idling begins Booklet entrance g...

Page 903: ...urned an error during the self diagnostic test Network interface board defective Controller board defective Self diagnostic Error NVRAM 824 B The resident non volatile RAM returned an error during the self diagnostic test NVRAM damaged or abnormal Backup battery has discharged NVRAM socket damaged Self diagnostic Error NVRAM Optional NVRAM 826 B The NVRAM or optional NVRAM returned an error during...

Page 904: ...LAN card not inserted into the wireless LAN board 854 Wireless LAN Error Card Error 2 B The board that holds the wireless LAN card can be accessed but the wireless LAN card 802 11b Bluetooth itself cannot be accessed while the machine is operating Wireless LAN card has been removed 855 Wireless LAN Error 3 Card Error 3 B An error is detected for the wireless LAN card 802 11b or Bluetooth Wireless ...

Page 905: ...rom either the operation panel or the network Software defective HDD defective 871 FCU Flash ROM Error B The address book written into the flash ROM mounted on the FCU is detected as defective Flash ROM device defective Replace flash ROM on the MBU 880 MLB Error B A request for access to the MLB Media Link Board was not answered within the specified time MLB defective Electronic total counter erro...

Page 906: ...ective BICU defective Connectors between BICU and controller loose or defective SIB defective Software write parameter setting error 986 C An unstable area at the storage destination in the settings table is set NULL for the parameter received by the write module Software defective Software performance error 990 B The software attempted to perform an unexpected operation Software defective Interna...

Page 907: ...defective An option required by the application RAM DIMM board is not installed Application start error 998 B After power on the application does not start within 60 s All applications neither start nor end normally Software defective An option required by the application RAM DIMM board is not installed Program download error The download program print data language data from the IC card does not ...

Page 908: ...Trouble shooting SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS SM 4 23 B079 B082 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 909: ...s SP if the customer cannot attain clean copies after performing automatic density adjustment 5112 Non Standard Paper Selection Determines whether a non standard paper size can be initialized for copying or not 0 No 1 Yes If is selected a non standard size can be input using the UP mode 5113 Selects the corresponding key for installed devices such as a coin lock Japan only 0 5 0 1 step 0 None 1 Ke...

Page 910: ...tion Referring to the SMC data lists re enter any values which had been changed from their factory settings Do SP 3 001 2 ID Sensor Initial Setting and SP4 911 1 HDD media check 6 Check the copy quality and the paper path and do any necessary adjustments 5 1 10 SOFTWARE RESET The software can be reboot when the machine hangs up Use the following procedure Turn the main power switch off and on or P...

Page 911: ... must be sent to the Design Center for analysis Since the amount of data can be fairly large approximately 4 MB compress the data with a standard compression program like ZIP or LZH and send it via email If a PC and the software for converting the IC card data to binary are not available you can send or deliver the IC card Rev 09 2003 ...

Page 912: ... IEEE1284 Centronics I F Engine I F PCI MB HDD More than 20 GB DC Conv 3V 5V IEEE 1394 USB 2 0 IEEE 802 11b Bluetooth Only One NVRAM RTC 32kB NVRAM 32kB CPU I F 120MHz MEMORY I F 120MHz DC Conv 3V 5V Resident Flash ROM 12MB System NIB Firmware ROM_DIMM Printer Scanner ROM_DIMM PS3 Option Option Options Option BICU FCU Option Option Option B079D901 WMF Rev 09 2003 ...

Page 913: ...297 mm Default 1450 V SP2309 1 Paper Lower Width a Width limit Default 150 mm SP2309 2 Paper Upper Width b Width limit Default 216 mm SP2914 1 Cα Adjust 10V step Default 150 V SP2914 2 Cβ Adjust 10V step Default 0 V The way that these SP modes are used is shown below For example with the default settings if the paper width fed from the by pass tray is 200 mm the charge roller voltage will be 1450 ...

Page 914: ... paper OHP sheets etc can also be loaded in the by pass tray but adjustments must be performed with the SP modes listed below in order to avoid jams and misfeeds SP Mode SP Name SP2 201 1 Development Bias Width 216 297 mm Default 510 V SP2 309 1 Paper Lower Width a Width limit Default 150 mm SP2 309 2 Paper Upper Width b Width limit Default 216 mm SP2 914 3 Process Control Setting Bγ Adjust 10V st...

Page 915: ... SCATTER PREVENTION To reduce the incidence of toner scattering the sponge strip has been replaced with a velvet strip A that extends across the length of the transfer belt unit At each end of the strip B and C new seals have been added B079D723 WMF A B C Rev 09 2003 ...

Page 916: ... kW Warm up Less than 1 3 kW Less than 1 3 kW Stand by Less than 170 W Less than 195 W Auto Off Mode Ave 8 W h NA Ave 9 W h EU Asia Ave 8 W h Ave 9 W h EU Asia Maximum Less than 1 44 kW NA Less than 1 5 kW EU Asia Less than 1 44 kW NA Less than 1 5 kW EU Asia Noise Emission Mode Model Mainframe Only Full System Copying B079 B082 69 dB A or less 70 dB A or less 73 dB A or less 74 dB A or less Stand...

Page 917: ...See Note 3 C B377 31 4 hole Northern Europe Key Counter Bracket C A674 User Account Enhance Unit C B443 Copier CSS Kit A886 C A886 Fax Option U B547 G3 Interface Unit U B591 Function Upgrade Board C A892 SAF Memory C G578 Fax Handset USA model only C A646 Printer Scanner Unit U B548 PostScript3 Unit U G354 17 Network Interface Board C B525 03 1394 Interface Unit C G336 USB 2 0 Interface Board C B5...

Page 918: ...LD045 RICOH AFICIO 2035 2045 SAVIN 4035 4045 SUBJECT PARTS CATALOG UPDATES GENERAL The following parts updates are being issued for all B079 B082 Parts Catalogs UPDATE 1 REFERENCE OLD PART NO NEW PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM AE020123 AE020125 Pressure Roller Mm32 Ass y 1 1 51 20 Pressure Roller The Pressure Roller has been changed to further minimize wrinkling PARTS Page 51 ...

Page 919: ...rs listed below will have the new style Pressure Roller Mm32 Ass y installed during production MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER Ricoh Aficio 2035 J5836500042 Ricoh Aficio 2045 J5936500001 UPDATE 2 Charge Roller The Charge Roller parts have been changed to further ensure proper contact of the Charge Roller terminals Page 45 Page 43 ...

Page 920: ...nal Charge Roller Receptacle Charge Roller installed during production MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER Ricoh Aficio 2035 J5836600001 Ricoh Aficio 2045 J5936600001 INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART 0 OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW machines 2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines 1 NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines OLD parts CAN NOT be...

Page 921: ... GESTETNER 3532 4532 LANIER LD035 LD045 RICOH AFICIO 2035 2045 SAVIN 4035 4045 SUBJECT INCORRECT POINT TO POINT FOR THE B408 FINISHER GENERAL The point to point for the B408 SR790 finisher is incorrect in the B079 B082 Service Manual Please use pages two and three of this bulletin for future reference for the B408 finisher SERVICE MANUAL ...

Page 922: ...e of the copies CAUSE Toner adheres to the hot roller strippers and dislodges onto the copies SOLUTION The width of the hot roller strippers has been decreased from 3mm to 0 5mm and the pressure of the tension spring has been decreased from 300mN to 50mN REFERENCE OLD PART NO NEW PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM AA060879 AA060948 Tension Spring 7 1 51 9 AE044030 AE044056 Hot Roller Stripper 7...

Page 923: ...W parts can be used in both OLD and NEW machines 2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines 1 NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines 3 S Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S N cut in On units...

Page 924: ...B is sent to destination A twice instead Conditions Only when Batch Transmission is enabled default Only with the FAX OPTION TYPE 1045 CAUSE A bug in the FCU firmware Batch Transmission module causes some destinations to be assigned the same Batch ID FIELD COUNTERMEASURE Update the FCU firmware for the FAX Option Type 2045 B547 to FAX Service Card B5485933B version 0 04 Since this concerns data se...

Page 925: ...ow must be replaced with the pages supplied An arrow has highlighted the revised areas PAGES i TOC Updated Information 14 FAX Function Upgrade Board Updated Information 35 Deleted SP1 102 and SP1 110 51 FAX Switch 01 Updated Information 52 FAX Switch 08 Updated Information 53 FAX Switch 09 FAX Switch 0A Updated Information 54 FAX Switch 0C Updated Information 55 FAX Switch 0E Updated Information 1...

Page 926: ...K LAYER 27 2 2 7 TRANSPORT LAYER 27 2 2 8 SESSION LAYER 28 2 2 9 DOCUMENT LAYER 29 2 2 10 PRESENTATION LAYER 29 2 3 FAX SC CODES 30 2 3 1 OVERVIEW 30 2 3 2 SC1201 30 2 3 3 SC1207 30 2 3 4 FAX SC CODE TABLE 31 2 4 ISDN TEST FUNCTION 32 2 4 1 LEDS 32 2 4 2 BACK TO BACK TEST 33 3 SERVICE TABLES 34 3 1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 34 3 1 1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION 34 Entering and Exiting SP mode 34 SP2 ...

Page 927: ...e lists of user programmed items and the system parameter list 2 If there is a printer option in the machine print out all data in the printer buffer 3 Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord the telephone line and the STP cable 1 Remove the controller unit A x 2 2 Remove the FCU cover B x 2 3 Remove the FCU harness and slide out the FCU board C B547I200 WMF A B C Rev 09 2003 ...

Page 928: ... 001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of the standard G3 board Section 3 2 Bit Switches G3 2 Switch 106 001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of the optional G3 board Section 3 2 Bit Switches G3 3 Switch 107 001 016 00 0F Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of the optional G3 board Section 3 2 Bit Switches G4 Internal Switch 108 00...

Page 929: ... 02 SP No 3 201 003 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 7 Binary picture processing Threshold for Text mode Normal setting center position This setting determines the threshold value for binary picture processing in Text mode when the scan density setting is at the center The value can be between 01 and FF For a darker threshold input a lower value Default setting 71 H 113 D FAX Switch 03 Not used do not ch...

Page 930: ...tween 0 Off and F For a weaker threshold input a lower value Default setting 7 This setting is independent from the threshold specified by the copier SP modes 4 to 7 MTF filter level Text Photo mode The value can be between 0 Off and F For a weaker threshold input a lower value Default setting 7 This setting is independent from the threshold specified by the copier SP modes FAX Switch 07 SP No 3 2...

Page 931: ... For a weaker threshold input a lower value larger dots are erased Default setting 7 This setting is independent from the threshold setting specified by the copier SP modes FAX Switch 0B SP No 3 201 012 No FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 to 3 Scan margin setting right and left margin in book scan ADF mode The setting can be between 0 and F H unit 0 5 mm Default setting 2 mm 4 to 7 Scan margin setting top and ...

Page 932: ... user to put the jammed page back into the original stack and continues scanning The message is displayed for the time period specified by scanner switch 0E bit 2 1 The machine erases all the scanned pages and asks the user to retry from the first page 1 to 2 Setting when an original size cannot be recognized Bit 2 1 Setting 0 0 No original 0 1 A5 1 0 A5 1 1 No original 3 7 Not used Do not change ...

Page 933: ...ays 0 Disabled 1 Enabled This bit determines whether the machine rotates the scanned image by 90 degrees before transmission If this bit is set at 1 A4 LT sideways images 297 mm width in the protocol will be transmitted as A4 LT lengthwise images 216 mm width in the protocol 1 Not used Do not change the setting 2 Image rotation before transmission A5 HLT lengthwise 0 Disabled 1 Enabled This bit de...

Page 934: ...he capabilities of each programmable item will change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit is installed Note With HDD column has been deleted Item Standard With Fax Function Upgrade Unit Quick Dial 500 2000 Groups 64 64 Destination per Group 500 500 Boxes Information Personal Transfer 150 400 Destinations dialed from the ten key pad overall 100 1000 Programs 100 200 Auto Document 6 18 Comm...

Page 935: ...aper Limit Sn Lower Tray Exit Sn Stapler H P Sn Stapler Tray Entrance Sn T1 Exit Guide Plate H P Sn Stack Height Sn Stapler Tray Paper Sn Stack Feed out Belt H P Sn T2 Staple Hammer Motor Lower Tray Lift Motor Tray Junction Gate Stapler Junction Gate Positioning Roller Shift Motor Exit Guide Plate Motor Main PCB PCB 1 T3 Front Door Safety Switch Lower Tray Upper Limit Switch Upper Cover Switch SW2...

Page 936: ... F2 S4 Shift HP 10 D2 S5 Stack Feed out Belt HP 19 F2 S6 Stapler HP 14 E2 S7 Exit Guide Plate HP 5 D2 S8 Stapler Tray Entrance 15 E2 S9 Lower Tray Exit 8 D2 S10 Stack Height 7 F2 S11 Lower Tray Lower Limit 24 E2 S12 Stapler Tray Paper 16 F2 S13 Staple Sheet 18 G9 S14 Stapler Rotation HP 20 G9 S15 Staple 21 G9 Solenoids SOL1 Tray Junction Gate 22 F9 SOL2 Stapler Junction Gate 30 F9 SOL3 Positioning...

Page 937: ...UNIT TYPE 2045 for AFICIO 2035 2045 SAVIN PRINTER SCANNER UNIT TYPE 2045 for 4035 4045 SUBJECT SERVICE MANUAL INSERT SERVICE MANUAL The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow PAGES i and ii Updated Information Table of Contents 29 Updated Information Printer Service Mode Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation All rig...

Page 938: ... BLUETOOTH G354 04 18 1 10 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS 20 2 TROUBLESHOOTING 21 2 1 CONTROLLER ERRORS 21 3 SERVICE TABLES 22 3 1 SCANNER SERVICE MODE 22 3 1 1 SCANNER PROGRAM MODE TABLE 22 3 2 PRINTER SERVICE MODE 29 3 2 1 SERVICE MODE TABLE 29 3 2 2 SP MODES RELATED TO PRINTER CONTROLLER 29 4 DETAILS 30 4 1 ETHERNET BOARD 30 4 1 1 ETHERNET BOARD LAYOUT 30 4 1 2 ETHERNET BOARD OPERATION 31 4 2 IEEE1394 B...

Page 939: ...leshooting Procedure 41 4 5 BLUETOOTH 42 4 5 1 SPECIFICATIONS 42 4 5 2 BLUETOOTH PROFILES 43 4 5 3 BLUETOOTH SECURITY FEATURES 43 SPECIFICATIONS 44 1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS 44 2 LED INDICATORS 44 3 PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS 45 4 USB SPECIFICATIONS 45 5 IEEE 802 11B SPECIFICATIONS 46 6 SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS 46 7 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES 47 7 1 PRINTER 47 PRINTER DRIVERS 47 UTILITY SOFTWARE 47 7 2 SCANNER 48 S...

Page 940: ...ller firmware 3 2 2 SP MODES RELATED TO PRINTER CONTROLLER The following SP modes are located in the copier SP mode Refer to section 5 1 of the main unit service manual SP No Description Function and Setting 5104 A3 DLT Double Count Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3 DLT 0 No 1 Yes If is selected the total counter and the current user code counter count up twice when A3 or DLT paper i...

Page 941: ...FIRMWARE HISTORY ...

Page 942: ... Technology Solutions Center FTP Site at http tsc ricohcorp com Be sure to check the README file for important notes and explanations NOTE Refer to Facts Line Bulletin FL002 and Publication Bulletin 023 for more information about the FTP Internet Web Site and EPROM Flash Card Exchange program An arrow has highlighted the revised areas TABLE OF CONTENTS BICU Engine 2 Controller 2 LCDC 3 MFP Service...

Page 943: ...ive control program modifications applied to ensure pressure roller maintains proper shape 4 SC350 detection conditions changed from 2 times Æ 10 times to eliminate unnecessary occurrences CONTROLLER Version Program No Check Sum Effective Date 1 04 2 B0825931C 92DA February 2003 production 1 05 1 B0825931 D 2A5B July 2003 production Version Description 1 04 2 1st Mass Production 1 05 1 Symptom Cor...

Page 944: ...Firmware History for B079 B082 Page 3 of 7 LCDC Version Description 1 07 1st Mass Production Version Program No Check Sum Effective Date 1 07 B0825211B 2E6C February 2003 production ...

Page 945: ... pitch 3 Barcodes appear separated shifted 4 Duplex face commands front rear are not applied correctly when the PCL page length command is used Specification Changes 1 Selecting HDD font or DIMM font may reduce available memory 2 Supports SAP Barcode OCR printing 1 03 1 Merged PCL job does not print 2 Only the first duplex command is interpreted correctly when printing PCL files containing simplex...

Page 946: ...command is applied when the PS file contains a mixture of simplex and duplex short long stapling orientations Note This does not occur when printing from Windows Configuration error when MediaType is set to an undefined value in the PS file modified to a default of 1 1 00 1st Mass Production ...

Page 947: ... Version Description 4 02 1st mass production 4 04 1 NIC fails to reboot after network settings are modified and NIC reboots several times 2 Hop count was mistakenly set at 4 making it impossible to obtain an auto IP address when there are 4 or more routers between the unit and DHCP server hop count corrected to 64 NFA Netfile Version Description 1 03 1st mass production 1 04 Machine does not swit...

Page 948: ...ion FCU Version Description 6 00 Transmission If the level of the CED signal the machine receives is much higher than its own V21 signal level it is unable to receive any V21 signals following that 5 00 Machine freezes if error 6 06 G3 ECM coding decoding error occurs while receiving Corrected the following two which occurred when Batch Transmission was enabled default When a document is set for P...

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands